Autodesk Auto CAD Architecture 2009 Instruction Manual Ug
User Manual: autodesk AutoCAD Architecture - 2009 - Instruction Manual Free User Guide for Autodesk AutoCAD Software, Manual
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 2756
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
AutoCAD Architecture 2009 User's Guide March 2008 © 2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. AutoCAD 2009 is produced under a license of data derived from DIC Color Guide® from Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Copyright © Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. All rights reserved. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable. Contents Workflow and User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 New Features and Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 New Features in AutoCAD Architecture 2009 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Drawing Management Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Wall Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Space Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Match Properties for AEC Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Improved Annotation Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 New Annotation Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Multiline Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Multiline Leaders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Material Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Performance Improvements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Data Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 64-bit Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 AutoCAD Highlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 A Quick Start for Transitioning from AutoCAD to AutoCAD Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Starting AutoCAD Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Default Content Paths for Microsoft Windows Vista . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Finding Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Autodesk Training Programs and Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Autodesk Authorized Training Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Autodesk Official Training Courseware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Autodesk Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 e-Learning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Contacting Autodesk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Sales Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 iii Chapter 2 The Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 The Workspace Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Workspaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Workspace Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Menu Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Quick Access Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Context Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Properties Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ribbon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Window Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Navigator Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finding Information in AutoCAD Architecture . . . . . . . . . . Info Center Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F1 Context Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tooltips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Objects in the Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Similar Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View and Navigation Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick View Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ViewCube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SteeringWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ShowMotion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Tool Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening the Tool Palettes Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling the Appearance of the Tool Palettes Set . . . . Specifying Different Tool Palettes for the Tool Palettes Set . Creating a New Tool Palettes Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Tool Palettes Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Tool Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining the Appearance of Tool Palettes . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text and Separator Lines to Tool Palettes . . . . . . Working with Tool Palettes from a Central Location . . . . Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Object with a Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Tool Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing a Tool Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refreshing a Tool Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Tool from an Object in the Drawing . . . . . . Copying a Tool from a Tool Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Tool from the Style Manager . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Tool from AEC Content in DesignCenter . . . . Using Command Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Tools from a Central Location . . . . . . . . Applying the Properties of a Tool to an Existing Object . . Re-Importing Styles for a Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Properties Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening the Properties Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Appearance of the Properties Palette . . . . . . The Design Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Display Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Extended Data Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv | Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 . 36 . 36 . 37 . 40 . 42 . 43 . 44 . 45 . 46 . 46 . 47 . 49 . 49 . 51 . 52 . 52 . 53 . 53 . 59 . 59 . 60 . 61 . 62 . 62 . 63 . 64 . 65 . 65 . 67 . 68 . 69 . 69 . 70 . 71 . 71 . 73 . 74 . 76 . 78 . 79 . 80 . 81 . 82 . 82 . 83 . 83 . 84 . 88 . 91 . 92 . 92 . 92 . 93 . 93 . 94 . 96 . 96 Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Direct Editing with Grips and Dynamic Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Grip Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Grip Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Using the CTRL Key with Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Trigger Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Dynamic Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Grip Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Temporary Grip Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 In-Place Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 In-Place Editing of Polyline-Based Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 In-Place Editing of Profile-Based Objects and Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 In-Place Editing of 3D Body Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 In-Place Editing of Material Hatches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Aligning the UCS to an Object Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Matching Object Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Isolating Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Isolating Objects to Edit in a Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Isolating Objects to Edit in an Elevation View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Isolating Objects to Edit in a Plan View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Isolating Objects to Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Isolating Objects to Hide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Ending the Object Isolation in a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Saving Isolated Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Isolating Objects in External References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Styles and Support Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Integration of AutoCAD Architecture and AutoCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Chapter 3 Content Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Understanding the Content Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exploring the Content Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing a Tool Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Items in a Tool Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Your Catalog Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Tool Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Tool Catalog from Content Drawings . . . . . Adding Tools from Content Drawings to a Tool Catalog . Adding an Existing Tool Catalog to Your Catalog Library . Creating a Catalog Install File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Publishing Tool Catalogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Website to Your Catalog Library . . . . . . . . . Editing Tool Catalog Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Catalog Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sorting Catalogs in the Library View . . . . . . . . . . . . Filtering Catalogs in the Library View . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a Tool Catalog or Website Link . . . . . . . . . Opening a Different Catalog Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Renaming a Catalog Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Searching for Items in a Tool Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Performing a Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Content to a Tool Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Categories in a Tool Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Tool Palette to a Tool Catalog . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Tool Package to a Tool Catalog . . . . . . . . . Adding Tools to a Tool Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying and Moving Tool Palettes and Tool Packages . . Copying and Moving Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing a Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Tool Catalog Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 . 122 . 123 . 125 . 126 . 126 . 127 . 129 . 131 . 132 . 133 . 134 . 135 . 136 . 136 . 137 . 137 . 137 . 138 . 138 . 139 . 139 . 141 . 142 . 142 . 143 . 143 . 144 . 145 . 146 Contents | v Using Tool Catalog Items in AutoCAD Architecture 2009 . . . . . . . . . Linked and Unlinked Tool Catalog Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using a Tool in the AutoCAD Architecture Workspace . . . . . . . Copying a Tool Palette to the AutoCAD Architecture Workspace . . Copying a Tool Package to the AutoCAD Architecture Workspace . Refreshing Linked Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refreshing Linked Tool Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Refresh Options for Linked Tool Palettes . . . . . . . . . Working with Multiple Content Browser Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening a Tool Catalog in a New Content Browser Window . . . . Opening Catalog Items in a New Content Browser Window . . . . Dragging Catalog Items Between Content Browser Windows . . . . Starting the Content Browser from a Windows Command Prompt . . . . Chapter 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 . 146 . 147 . 148 . 149 . 150 . 150 . 150 . 150 . 151 . 151 . 151 . 152 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 . 156 . 156 . 157 . 158 . 158 . 160 . 162 . 164 . 165 . 166 . 168 . 169 . 169 . 170 . 171 . 172 . 173 . 173 . 175 . 176 Interoperability with Other Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Importing and Exporting IFC Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Drawing Files Are Exported to IFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How IFC Files Are Imported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing LandXML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schema Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supported Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing LandXML Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Layer Keys for LandXML Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Publishing Drawing Files to Autodesk MapGuide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Published Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generating a MWX File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . An Overview of the Published Data Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . An Overview of the Database Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Publishing Data to Autodesk MapGuide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Property Set Data to an MDB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Publishing Drawings to DWF and DWFx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conditions and Limitations to Publishing Drawings to 3D DWF or DWFx . Exporting Property Set Data to a DWF or DWFx File . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi | Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Saving Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 About Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing from a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing Without a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening Legacy Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Drawing Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Drawing Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying a Layer Standard and a Layer Key Style . . . . Specifying the Default Display Representations . . . . . . Specifying AEC Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the AEC Editor Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the AEC Content Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying AEC Object Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Display Resolution of Objects with Facets . Changing the AEC Project Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Drawings with AutoCAD Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . Comparing Methods of Sharing Drawings . . . . . . . . . Generating Proxy Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Drawing to AutoCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Drawing to a DXF File . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewport Layer Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 . 178 . 188 . 193 . 193 . 193 . 196 . 196 . 198 . 199 . 199 . 199 . 200 . 200 . 201 . 202 . 204 . 204 . 205 . 206 Publishing Property Set Data from External References . . . . . . . . . . . . . Property Set Data Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Publishing a 3D DWF or 3D DWFx File with Automatic Property Set Data . . . Publishing a 3D DWF or 3D DWFx file with User-Defined Property Set Data . Publishing a 2D or 3D DWF or DWFx file with Property Set Data . . . . . . . Creating a New Published Property List (PPL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 . 207 . 208 . 210 . 212 . 215 Drawing Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Process Overview: Working in a Project Environment . . . Concepts of Drawing Management . . . . . . . . . . . . The Project Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before You Begin: External References . . . . . . . . . . . Before You Begin: Working in a Network Environment . . Project Support Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Default Project Options . . . . . . . . . . Working with Design Teams Located Remotely . . . . . . Opening a Project From a Mapped Drive . . . . . . The Project Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening the Project Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Project Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting a Project Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Project Properties . . . . . . . . . . . Moving a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Renaming a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closing All Project Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronically Transmitting a Project . . . . . . . . Deleting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closing the Project Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the Project Context . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening a Project from Windows Explorer . . . . . . . . The Project Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening the Project Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . The Tabs of the Project Navigator . . . . . . . . . . Using the Project Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Drawing Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying the Project Tool Palette Group . . . . . . . . . Displaying the Project Content Browser Library . . . . . . Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying a Level with Assigned Constructs . . . . . Changing the Properties of a Level . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Levels: Interactions with the Project . . . Divisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing a Division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Divisions: Interactions with the Project . Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Category in the Drawing Explorer . . . . Creating a Category from Windows Explorer . . . . Specifying the Location of Top-Level Categories . . Changing the Subcategory of a Project File . . . . . Deleting a Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constructs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When To Start with Constructs . . . . . . . . . . . The Role of Constructs in the Building Project . . . The Content of Constructs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 . 218 . 225 . 226 . 227 . 228 . 229 . 231 . 231 . 231 . 231 . 232 . 235 . 235 . 239 . 250 . 250 . 251 . 252 . 255 . 255 . 256 . 257 . 257 . 258 . 258 . 262 . 269 . 269 . 270 . 271 . 272 . 273 . 274 . 275 . 276 . 276 . 277 . 277 . 278 . 278 . 279 . 281 . 282 . 283 . 285 . 286 . 287 . 288 . 289 . 289 Contents | vii Creating a New Construct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying Constructs to Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Converting a Drawing to a Construct . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening and Closing a Construct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dragging Objects into a Construct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Referencing Elements into Constructs . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying External References of a Construct . . . . . . . . Changing the Properties of a Construct . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronically Transmitting a Construct . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Construct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Converting a Construct to an Element . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Constructs: Interactions with the Project . . . . . Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When to Start with Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing Elements in the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Converting a Drawing to an Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening and Closing an Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dragging Objects into an Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Properties of an Element . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronically Transmitting an Element . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting an Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Referencing an Element into Another Element . . . . . . . . Displaying External References Attached to an Element . . . Converting an Element to a Construct . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Elements: Interactions with the Project . . . . . . Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When to Start with Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process Overview: Creating a View Drawing . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New View Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying External References of a View Drawing . . . . . . Opening and Closing a View Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model Space View Drawing from a Callout . . . . Changing the Properties of a View Drawing . . . . . . . . . . Regenerating the View Drawings in a Project . . . . . . . . . Placing a View Drawing onto a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronically Transmitting a View Drawing . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a View Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model Space View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing a Model Space View onto a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Properties of a Model Space View . . . . . . . . Deleting Model Space Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronizing View Drawing Layers with Sheet View Layers . Changing Views: Interactions with the Project . . . . . . . . Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When to Start with Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Properties of the Project Sheet Set . . . . . . . . . Creating a Sheet Subset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Properties of a Sheet Subset . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a Sheet Subset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing Sheets into the Sheet Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing the Current Layout as a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . Opening and Closing a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Properties of a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Sheet Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Sheet View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening a Sheet View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Numbering Sheet Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii | Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 . 291 . 292 . 294 . 295 . 296 . 298 . 300 . 301 . 302 . 302 . 304 . 304 . 305 . 306 . 306 . 308 . 311 . 312 . 312 . 313 . 314 . 314 . 316 . 317 . 318 . 318 . 322 . 323 . 323 . 327 . 329 . 329 . 330 . 331 . 331 . 332 . 333 . 334 . 335 . 337 . 338 . 338 . 341 . 342 . 344 . 345 . 347 . 348 . 349 . 350 . 350 . 351 . 352 . 352 . 352 . 353 . 353 . 354 . 354 Deleting a Sheet View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying External References of a Sheet Drawing . . . . . . . . Inserting a Sheet List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Sheet List Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating the Sheet List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refreshing the Sheet Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Sheet Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activating a Sheet Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a Sheet Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronically Transmitting Sheets and Sheet Sets . . . . . . . . . Publishing Sheet Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Sheets: Interactions with the Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Sheet Set Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Sheet Set Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Template from Existing Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . Repath the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refreshing the Project Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Object Display in External References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generating Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Property Set Data and Schedule Tables in Projects . . . . . . . . . Creating a Title Block for a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Cut Planes in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Global Cut Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Object-Specific Cut Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Management Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command Line: Opening the Project Browser . . . . . . . . . . Command Line: Opening the Project Navigator . . . . . . . . . Command Line: Refreshing the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command Line: Regenerating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command Line: Selecting a New Project Environment . . . . . . Command Line: Closing the Project Navigator . . . . . . . . . . Frequently Asked Questions about Drawing Management . . . . . . . Appendix 1: Template Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Levels and Divisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project File Naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constructs Included in the Commercial Template Project . . . . The Element File Included in the Commercial Template Project . Views Included in the Template Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sheets Included in the Template Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 . 355 . 356 . 358 . 358 . 359 . 359 . 360 . 360 . 360 . 362 . 362 . 363 . 363 . 368 . 372 . 373 . 374 . 374 . 375 . 375 . 375 . 382 . 386 . 387 . 388 . 394 . 396 . 396 . 397 . 397 . 397 . 397 . 398 . 398 . 400 . 401 . 402 . 404 . 406 . 406 . 407 . 408 Project Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Project Standards Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Standards Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AEC Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AutoCAD Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronizing the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process Overview: Using Standards in a Project . . . Using Project Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites for Working with Project Standards . . Setting up Standards in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Project with Predefined Standards . Configuring Project Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Standard Tools in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Tool Catalog for a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 . 410 . 411 . 412 . 413 . 413 . 413 . 414 . 414 . 415 . 415 . 416 . 425 . 427 Contents | ix Adding a Project Catalog to a Content Browser Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Project Library and Tool Palette Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying the Project Tool Palette Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Building the Tool Palette Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying the Project Tool Palettes to the Tool Palette File Location . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Project Profile to the Tool Palette File Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Standards to a Project Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Tool Palette Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Standard Styles from Content Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Standard Styles from Style Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Standard Display Settings from Display Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronizing a Project with the Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronization Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronizing a Project with AEC Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronization Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronizing a Project Drawing with AEC Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronizing Selected Styles and Display Settings with AEC Standards . . . . . . . Generating a Synchronization Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronizing a Project with AutoCAD Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronizing a Project Drawing with AutoCAD Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auditing a Project or a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Showing Display Overrides in Project Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Project Drawings Outside the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Project Standards Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating Project Standards Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process Overview: Updating AEC Standards in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Versioning Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Types in Project Standards Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating Standard Objects in a Project Standards Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating Standard Objects in a Project Standards Drawing from a Project Drawing . Adding Standard Objects from a Project Drawing to a Project Standards Drawing . . Editing the Version History of a Standard Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Versioning a Project Standards Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purging the Version History from a Project Standards Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . Purging the Version Information from a Project Standards Drawing . . . . . . . . . Synchronizing Project Standards with Each Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Project Standards Drawings Outside the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scripting Project Standards Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 . 431 . 434 . 435 . 436 . 437 . 437 . 438 . 438 . 439 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 444 . 446 . 446 . 448 . 452 . 452 . 453 . 454 . 455 . 456 . 456 . 458 . 458 . 459 . 460 . 461 . 463 . 464 . 466 . 466 . 467 . 467 . 468 . 469 . 469 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 . 474 . 478 . 482 . 482 . 483 Layer Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 Layer Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Drawing Layers . . . . . . . . . . . Opening the Layer Manager . . . . . . . Making a Layer Current . . . . . . . . . Creating a Layer with a Layer Standard . Creating a Nonstandard Layer . . . . . . Renaming a Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Layer Standard of a Layer . Defining the Properties of a Layer . . . . x | Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 Overview of Drawing Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting a Drawing Compare Session . . . . . . . . . . . Reviewing the Results of a Drawing Compare Session . . Creating a Visual Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Compare Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frequently Asked Questions about Drawing Compare . Chapter 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 . 488 . 489 . 489 . 490 . 491 . 491 . 492 . 492 . 492 Overriding Layer Properties in Layout Viewports . . . . . Identifying Viewport Layer Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . Removing Viewport Layer Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Layer Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of Layer Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Group Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Property Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Layer Standards Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Layers to Layer Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Properties of a Layer Group . . . . . . . . . Renaming and Deleting Layer Groups . . . . . . . . . . . Converting a Property Filter to a Group Filter . . . . . . . New Layer Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up the Notification for New Layers . . . . . . . . Identifying New Layers in the Drawing . . . . . . . . . . Reconciling New Layers in the Drawing . . . . . . . . . . Working with Layer States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Saved Layer State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Saved Layer State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restoring a Layer State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Layer State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing Layer States to the Current Drawing . . . . . . Exporting a Layer State from the Current Drawing . . . . Working with Layer Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default Layer Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default Layer Key Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Layer Key Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Layer Key Style from an LY File . . . . . . . . . Editing Layer Key Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching Notes and Files to a Layer Key Style . . . . . . Layer Key Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Editing Layer Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Fields in Layer Standards . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Layer Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Component Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Descriptive Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Description Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purging Layer Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing Layer Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Layer Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix: LISP Changes for Layer Snapshots and Layer States . Chapter 10 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 . 495 . 496 . 497 . 498 . 499 . 499 . 503 . 503 . 504 . 505 . 505 . 505 . 505 . 507 . 507 . 508 . 508 . 511 . 512 . 513 . 513 . 514 . 514 . 516 . 520 . 521 . 521 . 522 . 523 . 524 . 526 . 527 . 532 . 532 . 533 . 534 . 534 . 535 . 535 . 536 . 536 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537 Introduction to the Display System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Properties Palette to Change Display Properties . . . . . . . . Display System Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Representations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Display Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening the Display Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Display Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Display Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Display Representations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing an Object in a Display Representation . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing the Display Representation of an Object in a Display Set . Accessing the Default Display Properties of an Object . . . . . . . Creating and Editing Display Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537 . 538 . 543 . 544 . 548 . 549 . 552 . 553 . 554 . 555 . 556 . 557 . 558 . 559 . 559 Contents | xi Process Overview: Creating a Display Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tips for Working with Display Configurations, Sets, and Representations . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Display Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Display Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Display Representation for an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Display Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning a Display Representation to a Display Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Comparing Display Representations Between Display Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning a Display Set to a View Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning a Display Configuration to a Viewport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying a Display Set as a Default Display Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Default Display Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Display Configurations Used in Xref Overlays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Display Configuration Used in Xref Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Objects by Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Settings for Live Sections and Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Display Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Renaming a Display Configuration or a Display Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Renaming a Display Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Display Configuration or a Display Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Display Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Notes and Reference Files to a Display Configuration or a Display Set . . . . . . . . Using Display Settings in Multiple Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purging a Display Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purging a Display Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purging a Display Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Standard Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronizing Individual Display Settings with AEC Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Excluding Display Settings from Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating Standard Display Settings in a Project Standards Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating Standard Display Settings in the Project Standards Drawing from a Project Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Standard Display Settings from a Project Drawing to a Project Standards Drawing . Editing the Version History of a Standard Display Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purging the Version History from a Project Standards Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purging the Version Information from a Project Standards Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronizing Project Standards with Each Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting the Display System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Object Not Displayed in a Viewport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewport Not Updating Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Objects Copied from Another Drawing Display Differently . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verifying the Existence of Objects Not Displayed in a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Object Linetype Displayed Incorrectly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 11 . 559 . 560 . 560 . 561 . 562 . 562 . 563 . 565 . 566 . 566 . 567 . 567 . 568 . 569 . 570 . 570 . 571 . 572 . 572 . 572 . 573 . 573 . 574 . 576 . 576 . 576 . 577 . 579 . 579 . 579 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581 . 583 . 584 . 584 . 585 . 585 . 586 . 586 . 586 . 586 . 587 . 587 Style Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589 Style Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started with the Style Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . Sorting Styles in the Style Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Styles in the Style Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Styles Across Multiple Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Drawings and Templates in the Style Manager . Creating a Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying and Assigning a Style to an Object . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Tool from a Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Renaming a Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying Styles Between Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending Styles to Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purging Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii | Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589 . 590 . 592 . 593 . 594 . 594 . 596 . 597 . 597 . 597 . 598 . 599 . 599 Chapter 12 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Objects That Support Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Material Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Material Tool to Add Materials to Objects . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Custom Material Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Material Tool Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Material Components and Display Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linework Material Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plan Hatch Material Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D Body Material Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surface Hatch Material Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D Section/Elevation Linework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section Hatch Material Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sectioned Body and Sectioned Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Materials in a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Surface Hatches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surface Hatches on Curved Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surface Hatches on Multiple Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surface Hatches on Extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surface Hatches on Free Form Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overriding the Surface Hatch on Individual Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hiding a Surface Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying a Hidden Surface Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Rotation of a Surface Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Horizontal and Vertical Offset of a Surface Hatch . . . . . Editing Surface Hatch Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying a List of Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying a Material Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process Overview: Creating and Assigning Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Editing Material Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining the Layer, Color and Linetype of a Material Definition . . . . . Specifying the Plan and Section Hatch Patterns of a Material Definition . Specifying the Surface Hatch Pattern of a Material Definition . . . . . . Assigning Render Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Excluding a Material Definition from 2D Section Shrinkwrap . . . . . . Controlling the Display of Hidden Lines by Material . . . . . . . . . . . Merging Material Definitions in a 2D Section/Elevation . . . . . . . . . Attaching Notes and Files to a Material Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601 . 603 . 605 . 605 . 606 . 610 . 610 . 611 . 611 . 611 . 612 . 613 . 613 . 614 . 614 . 615 . 615 . 616 . 616 . 618 . 618 . 619 . 620 . 620 . 621 . 622 . 623 . 623 . 624 . 624 . 625 . 626 . 626 . 627 . 629 . 631 . 632 . 633 . 633 Content Creation Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635 General Content Standards and Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . Content Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . National CAD Standard Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . Content Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Template Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Style Library Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Template Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Catalogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Style-Based Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Architectural Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Documentation Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Purpose Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol & Tool-Based Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AEC Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Palette-Based and Miscellaneous Annotation Tool Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635 . 635 . 636 . 639 . 639 . 641 . 642 . 644 . 644 . 646 . 646 . 662 . 668 . 676 . 676 . 678 Contents | xiii Conceptual Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 Chapter 14 Creating Conceptual Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683 Mass Elements and Mass Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Create Mass Elements . . . . . . . Editing Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Element Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Create Mass Groups . . . . . . . . Using Materials for Mass Elements and Mass Groups . . . Using the Model Explorer to Create Mass Models . . . . . . . . Displaying the Model Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining the View in the Model Explorer . . . . . . . . . Navigating the View in the Model Explorer . . . . . . . . Navigating the View with the ViewCube . . . . . . . . . Navigating the View with SteeringWheels . . . . . . . . . Viewing Objects on a Nonvisible Layer . . . . . . . . . . Maintaining Zoom Percentage and Position of an Object . Using Toolbar Commands in the Model Explorer . . . . . Creating Slice Floorplates from a Conceptual Model . . . . . . Generating a Slice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Slice Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching Objects to a Slice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detaching Objects from a Slice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Converting a Slice to a Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Location of a Slice . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Slice . . . . . . Chapter 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683 . 685 . 697 . 720 . 725 . 737 . 741 . 742 . 743 . 743 . 744 . 744 . 745 . 745 . 746 . 751 . 751 . 752 . 753 . 753 . 753 . 753 . 754 Quick Slice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755 Quick Slice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755 Creating a Quick Slice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755 Chapter 16 Object Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757 Object Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining the View in the Object Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigating the View in the Object Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigating the View with the ViewCube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigating the View with SteeringWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the View Direction of the Object Viewer to the Drawing Area . Saving a Preview Image from the Object Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757 . 760 . 761 . 762 . 762 . 763 . 764 Napkin Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765 Napkin Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765 Creating a Napkin Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767 Editing a Napkin Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767 Designing with Architectural Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769 Chapter 18 Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771 Overview of Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Workflow Overview: Adding Walls to a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Drawing Defaults for Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Wall Tools To Create Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Orientation of a Wall Segment While Drawing It . Changing the Justification of a Wall Segment While Drawing It . xiv | Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771 . 773 . 776 . 777 . 777 . 778 . 778 Repositioning a Wall Segment While Drawing It . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Wall with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Wall Segment Using Justification Line Object Snaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Wall from Linework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Wall from a 3D Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Wall Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Grips to Edit Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Location of a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Shape of a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Wall Width while Maintaining the Wall Baseline . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Wall Width while Maintaining the Opposite Face of the Wall . . . Changing the Wall Base Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Wall Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Wall Justification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Offsetting New Walls from Existing Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repositioning a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting the Position of Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Tool Properties to an Existing Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Style of a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Location of a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Merging Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing Individual Merge Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing All Merged Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filleting Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chamfering Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trimming Walls at L and T Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reversing the Direction of a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using AutoCAD Commands to Edit Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Roof Line and the Floor Line of a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Materials of Individual Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Display Properties of Individual Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching Notes and Files to a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Cleanup of Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleanup Circles and Wall Justification Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall Cleanups and Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Guidelines for Successful Wall Cleanup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning a Different Wall Cleanup Group Definition to Existing Walls . . . . . . Specifying Cleanup for Individual Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overriding the Wall Cleanup Circle Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overriding Component Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting Wall Cleanups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleanup Group Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Objects to Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Window to a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Opening to a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Door to a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Door/Window Assembly to a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing Windows, Openings, Doors, or Door/Window Assemblies from a Wall . Anchoring an Object to a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detaching Objects from a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Special Conditions and Customized Wall Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Wall Sweeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Wall Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Body Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Interference Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Wall Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Set Data to a Wall Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780 . 781 . 784 . 786 . 787 . 788 . 791 . 791 . 794 . 796 . 797 . 798 . 799 . 800 . 801 . 802 . 803 . 804 . 805 . 805 . 806 . 806 . 807 . 807 . 807 . 809 . 810 . 812 . 813 . 814 . 814 . 823 . 824 . 830 . 830 . 831 . 833 . 834 . 835 . 836 . 837 . 837 . 838 . 843 . 845 . 846 . 846 . 846 . 847 . 847 . 847 . 848 . 848 . 849 . 857 . 867 . 872 . 874 . 875 . 876 Contents | xv Specifying the Components of a Wall Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Materials of a Wall Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Display Properties of a Wall Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Classifications to a Wall Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining a Wall Style as Bounding for Associative Spaces . . . . . . . . . . Attaching Notes and Files to a Wall Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Wall Endcaps and Opening Endcaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process Overview: Options for Working with Wall and Opening Endcaps . Displaying In-Place Edit Grips for Wall Endcaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Wall Endcaps Using Calculate Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Wall Endcap Polylines and Multiple Components . . . . . . Modifying Wall Endcaps Using AEC Modify Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Wall Endcap Styles from the Style Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Geometry of a Wall Endcap Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Return Offset of a Wall Endcap Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching Notes and Files to a Wall Endcap Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Wall Opening Endcap Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying a Wall Opening Endcap Style to a Wall Style . . . . . . . . . . . Overriding a Wall Opening Endcap Style on a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Ortho Close and Close with Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Wall Lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Curved Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Offsets for Roof Line and Floor Line Vertices . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Width and Edge Offset of a Wall Component . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876 . 886 . 889 . 893 . 893 . 893 . 894 . 894 . 895 . 902 . 905 . 906 . 917 . 918 . 920 . 921 . 921 . 922 . 922 . 923 . 923 . 923 . 924 . 925 Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927 Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927 Using Curtain Wall Tools To Create Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930 Creating a Straight Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 931 Creating a Curtain Wall with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932 Creating a Curved Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933 Creating a Curtain Wall that References a Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934 Converting a Layout Grid to a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935 Creating a Curtain Wall from an Elevation Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936 Converting a Wall to a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938 Converting a 3D Face to a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939 Creating a Curtain Wall Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940 Curtain Wall Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941 Process Overview: Creating a Curtain Wall Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942 Tips for Working Efficiently with Curtain Wall Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 943 Creating Element Definitions for a Curtain Wall Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 943 Creating a Curtain Wall Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944 Defining Divisions for Curtain Wall Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945 Defining Infills for Curtain Wall Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954 Defining Curtain Wall Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958 Defining Curtain Wall Mullions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963 Assigning Definitions to Curtain Wall Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968 Assigning a Division to a Curtain Wall Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968 Assigning Infills to Curtain Wall Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969 Assigning Definitions to Curtain Wall Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977 Assigning Definitions to Curtain Wall Mullions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980 Specifying the Materials of a Curtain Wall Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982 Specifying the Display of Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 984 Defining a Curtain Wall Style as Bounding for Associative Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989 Attaching Notes and Files to a Curtain Wall Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989 Using Overrides in Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989 Overriding Curtain Wall Infills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 990 Overriding Curtain Wall Frames and Mullions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996 Overriding Curtain Wall Divisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003 xvi | Contents Removing Curtain Wall Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Element Definitions for Curtain Wall Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Grips to Edit Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Different Curtain Wall Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying the Properties of an Existing Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Dimensions of a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Curtain Wall Location Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Interference Condition to a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . Removing an Interference Condition from a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . Mitering Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying a Miter Angle for a Curtain Wall Adjacent to Another Object . Specifying the Cut Plane Display of a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Display of Other Characteristics of a Curtain Wall . . . . . Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Roof Line and the Floor Line of a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . Offsetting or Projecting the Roof Line of a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . Offsetting or Projecting the Floor Line of a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . Editing the Roof Line or the Floor Line of a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . Changing the Roof Line and the Floor Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Gable to the Roof Line of a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Step to the Roof Line or Floor Line of a Curtain Wall . . . . . . Changing Vertices in the Roof Line or Floor Line of a Curtain Wall . . . . Specifying Gable Settings for a Roof Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Step Settings for a Roof Line or Floor Line . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Vertex Settings for a Roof Line or Floor Line . . . . . . . . . . Editing Objects Anchored in Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Orientation of an Object Anchored in a Curtain Wall . . . Changing the Alignment of an Object Anchored in a Curtain Wall . . . . Changing the Offset of an Object Anchored in a Curtain Wall . . . . . . Swapping Two Objects Anchored in a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . Releasing an Object Anchored in a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain Wall Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Wall Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Curtain Wall Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Converting a Layout Grid to a Curtain Wall Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Curtain Wall Unit with a Custom Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain Wall Unit Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Element Definitions for a Curtain Wall Unit Style . . . . . . . . Creating a Curtain Wall Unit Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Divisions for Curtain Wall Unit Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Infills for Curtain Wall Unit Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Curtain Wall Unit Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Curtain Wall Unit Mullions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning a Division to a Curtain Wall Unit Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Infills to Curtain Wall Unit Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Definitions to Curtain Wall Unit Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Definitions to the Mullions of a Curtain Wall Unit . . . . . . Specifying the Materials of a Curtain Wall Unit Style . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Display of Curtain Wall Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining a Curtain Wall Unit Style as Bounding for Associative Spaces . . Attaching Notes and Files to a Curtain Wall Unit Style . . . . . . . . . . Using Overrides in Curtain Wall Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overriding Curtain Wall Unit Infills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overriding Curtain Wall Unit Frames and Mullions . . . . . . . . . . . . Overriding Curtain Wall Unit Divisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing Curtain Wall Unit Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Curtain Wall Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Grips to Edit Curtain Wall Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Different Curtain Wall Unit Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007 . 1008 . 1009 . 1009 . 1014 . 1015 . 1015 . 1016 . 1017 . 1017 . 1017 . 1018 . 1018 . 1019 . 1021 . 1021 . 1022 . 1023 . 1023 . 1025 . 1027 . 1028 . 1029 . 1030 . 1031 . 1032 . 1033 . 1033 . 1033 . 1034 . 1034 . 1034 . 1034 . 1036 . 1036 . 1037 . 1038 . 1039 . 1040 . 1040 . 1041 . 1048 . 1051 . 1055 . 1060 . 1060 . 1066 . 1069 . 1071 . 1073 . 1078 . 1078 . 1079 . 1079 . 1086 . 1093 . 1096 . 1097 . 1097 . 1100 Contents | xvii Matching the Properties of an Existing Curtain Wall Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Dimensions of a Curtain Wall Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying a Miter Angle for a Curtain Wall Unit Adjacent to Another Object . Changing the Location of a Freestanding Curtain Wall Unit . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Position of Anchored Curtain Wall Units . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Cut Plane Display of a Curtain Wall Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Display of Other Characteristics of a Curtain Wall Unit . . . . . Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Curtain Wall Unit . . . . . . . . . . Facet Deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1101 . 1101 . 1102 . 1102 . 1103 . 1104 . 1105 . 1106 . 1107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109 . 1112 . 1118 . 1120 . 1168 . 1185 . 1186 . 1196 Polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199 AEC Polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using AEC Polygon Tools to Create AEC Polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an AEC Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an AEC Polygon with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an AEC Polygon from a Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an AEC Polygon from a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an AEC Polygon Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing AEC Polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Grips to Edit AEC Polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the AEC Polygon Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Merging Two AEC Polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Hole in an AEC Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating AEC Polygons from the Intersection of Other AEC Polygons . . . . . . . . . . Trimming an AEC Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dividing an AEC Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Vertex to an AEC Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a Vertex from an AEC Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Converting an AEC Polygon to a Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Converting an AEC Polygon to a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Rotation of an AEC Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Elevation of an AEC Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Location of an AEC Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Fill Properties for the True Color Display Representation of an AEC Polygon . Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to an AEC Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AEC Polygon Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an AEC Polygon Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Width and Justification of the AEC Polygon Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . Masking Underlying Objects with AEC Polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Display Properties of an AEC Polygon Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Colors of the True Color Display Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching Notes and Files to an AEC Polygon Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Classifications to an AEC Polygon Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 22 . . . . . . . . . Door and Window Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109 Door and Window Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Door and Window Assembly Tools to Create Door and Window Assemblies . Creating a Door and Window Assembly Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door and Window Assembly Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Overrides in Door and Window Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Element Definitions for Door and Window Assembly Styles . . . . . . . Editing Door and Window Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Objects Anchored in Door and Window Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199 . 1201 . 1201 . 1202 . 1202 . 1203 . 1203 . 1204 . 1205 . 1211 . 1211 . 1212 . 1213 . 1213 . 1214 . 1215 . 1215 . 1215 . 1216 . 1216 . 1216 . 1217 . 1217 . 1218 . 1219 . 1219 . 1220 . 1221 . 1221 . 1224 . 1225 . 1225 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1227 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1227 Using Door Tools to Create Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1229 Creating a Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1229 xviii | Contents Creating a Door with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Door in a Door and Window Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Door from Door/Window Assemblies, Openings, and Windows . Creating a Door Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Grips to Edit Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Door Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Door Leaf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing How Door Width Is Measured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Door Swing Angle or Opening Percent . . . . . . . . . Changing the Vertical Alignment of a Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving a Door Along a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving a Door Within a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Anchors to Change the Horizontal Position of a Door . . . . . Using Anchors to Change the Vertical Position of a Door . . . . . . . Using Anchors to Change the Position of a Door Within a Wall . . . Changing the Orientation of a Door to a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving a Door to a Different Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Releasing a Door from a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Opening Endcap Assigned to a Door . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Location of a Freestanding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Cut Plane Setting for a Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Display of Muntins Blocks for a Door . . . . . . . . . Reversing the Handing for a Door in an Elevation View . . . . . . . . Specifying the Swing Display for a Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Panel Display for a Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Display of Frames for a Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Threshold Dimensions for a Door . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Threshold Symbol for a Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Display of Custom Block Components of a Door . . . Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, and Files to a Door . . . . . . . . . . . Door Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Door Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Dimensions of a Door Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Design Rules of a Door Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Standard Sizes of a Door Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom Door Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the Door Shape in a Door Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing the Geometry of a Door Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Door Display Components and Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Display Properties of a Door Style . . . . . . . . . . . Defining a Door Style as Bounding for Associative Spaces . . . . . . . Attaching Notes and Files to a Door Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Muntins in a Door Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1230 . 1232 . 1232 . 1232 . 1234 . 1234 . 1241 . 1241 . 1242 . 1243 . 1243 . 1244 . 1246 . 1248 . 1249 . 1250 . 1251 . 1251 . 1251 . 1251 . 1252 . 1252 . 1253 . 1253 . 1254 . 1254 . 1254 . 1255 . 1256 . 1256 . 1258 . 1258 . 1259 . 1260 . 1261 . 1262 . 1262 . 1263 . 1263 . 1265 . 1268 . 1273 . 1274 . 1274 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1297 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1297 Using Window Tools to Create Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1299 Creating a Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1299 Creating a Window with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1300 Creating a Window in a Door and Window Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1302 Creating a Window from Doors, Door/Window Assemblies and Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1302 Creating a Window Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1303 Editing Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305 Using Grips to Edit Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305 Changing the Window Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311 Changing How Window Width is Measured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311 Changing the Window Swing Angle or Opening Percent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1312 Changing the Vertical Alignment of a Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1313 Contents | xix Moving a Window Along a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving a Window Within a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Anchors to Change the Horizontal Position of a Window . . . Using Anchors to Change the Vertical Position of a Window . . . . . Using Anchors to Change the Position of a Window Within a Wall . Changing the Orientation of a Window to a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Opening Endcap Assigned to a Window . . . . . . . . Changing the Location of a Freestanding Window . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Cut Plane Setting for a Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Display of Muntins Blocks for a Window . . . . . . . Specifying the Display of Sills for a Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reversing the Handing for a Window in an Elevation View . . . . . . Specifying the Display of Frames for a Window . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Display of Custom Block Components of a Window . Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, and Files to a Window . . . . . . . . . Window Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Dimensions of a Window Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Standard Sizes of a Window Style . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom Window Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Design Rules of a Window Style . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing the Geometry of a Window Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Window Display Components and Materials . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Materials to a Window Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Classifications to a Window Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Display Properties of a Window Style . . . . . . . . . Defining a Window Style as Bounding for Associative Spaces . . . . . Attaching Notes and Files to a Window Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Muntins in a Window Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1313 . 1315 . 1317 . 1318 . 1319 . 1320 . 1320 . 1320 . 1321 . 1321 . 1322 . 1323 . 1323 . 1324 . 1326 . 1326 . 1327 . 1328 . 1329 . 1330 . 1331 . 1331 . 1333 . 1334 . 1335 . 1335 . 1340 . 1341 . 1341 Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1363 Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Opening Tools to Create Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Opening with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Opening from Doors, Door/Window Assemblies and Windows . Creating and Editing Custom Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Profile for a Custom Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Opening with a Custom Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing the Geometry of a Custom Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Opening Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Grips to Edit Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Shape and Dimensions of an Opening . . . . . . . . . . Flipping an Opening along the X or Y Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Endcap Style for an Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Tool Properties to an Existing Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . Repositioning an Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Anchors to Change the Horizontal Position of an Opening . . . Using Anchors to Change the Vertical Position of an Opening . . . . . Changing the Position of an Opening Within a Wall . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Orientation of an Opening to a Wall . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Location of an Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Cut Plane Setting for an Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Display of Sills for an Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Display of Custom Block Components of an Opening . . Specifying the Display of Fill Type for an Opening . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, and Files to an Opening . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Display Properties of Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx | Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1363 . 1364 . 1365 . 1365 . 1367 . 1367 . 1367 . 1368 . 1369 . 1371 . 1373 . 1373 . 1374 . 1374 . 1375 . 1375 . 1376 . 1378 . 1379 . 1380 . 1381 . 1381 . 1382 . 1382 . 1383 . 1384 . 1385 . 1386 Specifying the Display Properties of an Opening . . . . . Specifying the Hatching of an Opening . . . . . . . . . Using Custom Blocks to Create Opening Components . Adding Components to an Opening . . . . . . . . . . . Turning Off Custom Components in an Opening . . . . Removing Custom Components from an Opening . . . Chapter 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1386 . 1387 . 1388 . 1388 . 1389 . 1390 Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1391 Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solution Tips for Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying AEC Options for Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Stair Tools to Create Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Stair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Straight Stair with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Multi-Landing Stair with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . Creating an L-Shaped Stair with 45-Degree Tread . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a U-Shaped Stair with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . Creating a Spiral Stair with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom Stair from Linework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom Stair from Tread Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Custom Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Stair Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Grips to Edit Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Width of a Flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Shape of a Flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Shape of a Landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Side of a Stair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Height of a Stair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Justification of a Stair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Style of a Stair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Horizontal Direction of a Spiral or U-Shaped Stair . Changing the Constraints of a Spiral Stair . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Outside Edge of a Spiral Stair . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Dimensions of a Stair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Floor Settings of a Stair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting Stair Length Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Length Limits of a Flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anchoring a Stair to a Landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Releasing Anchored Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Winders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Stair Body Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stair Interference Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Alignment of a U-Shaped Stair . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Components of a Flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Components of a Landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About the Dimensions of Landing Components . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Extension of a Landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Stair Component Display by Cut Plane Elevation . . . Changing the Display of an Overlapping Stair . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Tool Properties to an Existing Stair . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Location of a Stair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Materials of a Stair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Display Properties of Individual Stairs . . . . . . . Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Stair . . . . . . . . . . . Stair Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Stair Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Stair Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1391 . 1392 . 1395 . 1396 . 1396 . 1397 . 1399 . 1404 . 1406 . 1410 . 1415 . 1418 . 1420 . 1424 . 1425 . 1426 . 1426 . 1440 . 1441 . 1442 . 1444 . 1450 . 1451 . 1452 . 1452 . 1452 . 1453 . 1455 . 1457 . 1458 . 1459 . 1460 . 1461 . 1461 . 1475 . 1480 . 1489 . 1490 . 1491 . 1493 . 1493 . 1494 . 1498 . 1500 . 1500 . 1501 . 1501 . 1507 . 1507 . 1508 . 1508 Contents | xxi Specifying the Design Rules of a Stair Style . . . . . . . . Specifying the Stringers of a Stair Style . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Mitered Corners for Center Stringers . . . . . Specifying the Components of a Stair Style . . . . . . . Specifying the Landing Extension of a Stair Style . . . . Assigning Materials to Components in a Stair Style . . . Specifying the Display Properties of a Stair Style . . . . . Specifying the Riser Numbering Display of a Stair Style . Specifying Classifications for a Stair Style . . . . . . . . Adding Notes and Files to a Stair Style . . . . . . . . . . Stair Winder Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Stair Winder Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Stair Winder Style Settings . . . . . . . . Adding Notes and Files to a Stair Winder Style . . . . . . Stair Tower Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Stair Tower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Stair Tower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1509 . 1510 . 1512 . 1514 . 1515 . 1516 . 1518 . 1521 . 1522 . 1522 . 1522 . 1523 . 1523 . 1524 . 1525 . 1525 . 1526 Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1529 Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Railing Tools to Create Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Railing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Attached Railing with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Freestanding Railing with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . Creating a Railing from a Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Railing Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Grips to Edit Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Post to a Railing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a Post from a Railing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redistributing Posts on a Railing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hiding Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Showing Hidden Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reversing the Direction of the Railing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anchoring an Existing Railing to a Stair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anchoring an Existing Railing to an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Releasing an Anchored Railing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Display of Custom Block Components of a Railing . . Specifying Cleanup Settings for a Railing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Profile to a Railing Component . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Custom Profile of a Railing Component . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Display of a Custom Profile Component of a Railing . Changing the Style of a Railing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Upper Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Bottom Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Railing Extensions at Floor Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Railing Extensions at Landings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Anchor Properties of a Railing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Perpendicular Railing Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Location of a Railing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Tool Properties to an Existing Railing . . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, and Files to a Railing . . . . . . . . . . Railing Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Railing Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Upper Rails of a Railing Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Bottom Rails of a Railing Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Posts of a Railing Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Components of a Railing Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii | Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1529 . 1530 . 1531 . 1531 . 1534 . 1536 . 1537 . 1538 . 1538 . 1539 . 1540 . 1540 . 1541 . 1541 . 1541 . 1541 . 1542 . 1543 . 1544 . 1547 . 1547 . 1548 . 1550 . 1553 . 1553 . 1554 . 1555 . 1556 . 1557 . 1557 . 1558 . 1560 . 1561 . 1561 . 1562 . 1563 . 1564 . 1565 . 1566 . 1568 Creating a Profile for a Custom Railing Component . . . . . . . . Specifying the Railing Extensions of a Railing Style . . . . . . . . Specifying the Materials of a Railing Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Display Components of a Railing Style . . . . . . . Specifying Classifications for a Railing Style . . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching Notes and Files to a Railing Style . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Custom Railing Blocks and Profiles to a Railing Style . . . . . . Adding a Custom Block to a Railing Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Profile to a Railing Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turning Off a Custom Block or Custom Profile in a Railing Style . Removing a Custom Block from a Railing Style . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1569 . 1569 . 1570 . 1572 . 1573 . 1573 . 1574 . 1574 . 1577 . 1580 . 1581 Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1583 Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Roof Tools to Create Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dormers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Slope Roof with User-Specified Settings . . . Creating a Gable Roof with User-Specified Settings . . Creating a Roof from Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof from Polylines . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Grips to Edit Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Tool Properties to an Existing Roof . . Changing the Dimensions of a Roof . . . . . . . Changing the Edges and Faces of a Roof . . . . . Converting a Roof to Roof Slabs . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Material of a Roof . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Display Properties of a Roof . . . . Specifying the Hatching of a Roof . . . . . . . . Changing the Location of a Roof . . . . . . . . . Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Roof . Chapter 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1583 . 1584 . 1585 . 1586 . 1586 . 1586 . 1587 . 1588 . 1589 . 1590 . 1591 . 1591 . 1592 . 1592 . 1593 . 1594 . 1594 . 1595 . 1596 . 1597 . 1597 Slabs and Roof Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1599 Overview of Slabs and Roof Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Tools to Create Slabs and Roof Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Slab or a Roof Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Slab/Roof Slab with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . Creating a Slab or Roof Slab from Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof Slab from a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Slab or Roof Slab from a Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Slab from a Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Slab or Roof Slab Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Slabs and Roof Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Grips to Edit Slabs/Roof Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Tool Properties to an Existing Slab/Roof Slab . . . . Changing the Properties of Slabs or Roof Slabs . . . . . . . . . Using Slab and Roof Slab Context Menu Tools . . . . . . . . . Creating a Clipped Gable Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Dormer in a Roof Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slab and Roof Slab Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Slab or Roof Slab Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Components of a Slab or Roof Slab Style . . . . Specifying the Materials of a Slab or Roof Slab Style . . . . . . Specifying the Display Properties of a Slab or Roof Slab Style . Adding Classifications to a Slab or Roof Slab Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1599 . 1602 . 1603 . 1604 . 1606 . 1608 . 1608 . 1611 . 1611 . 1613 . 1614 . 1629 . 1629 . 1632 . 1650 . 1651 . 1652 . 1653 . 1654 . 1659 . 1661 . 1664 Contents | xxiii Defining a Slab/Roof Slab Style as Bounding for Associative Spaces . . . . . . . Attaching Notes and Files to a Slab or Roof Slab Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slab and Roof Slab Edge Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Slab or Roof Slab Edge Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Overhang, Edge Cut, and Angle of a Slab/Roof Slab Edge Style . Creating Profiles for the Fascia and Soffit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Profile Edges and Extrusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying a Fascia and a Soffit for a Slab/Roof Slab Edge Style . . . . . . . . . Editing the Geometry of Fascia and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Materials to a Slab/Roof Slab Edge Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turning on Materials for a Slab/Roof Slab Edge Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching Notes and Files to a Slab/Roof Slab Edge Style . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1665 . 1665 . 1666 . 1667 . 1668 . 1669 . 1670 . 1671 . 1672 . 1674 . 1674 . 1675 Structural Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1677 Structural Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process Overview: Creating Structural Members with the Structural Member Catalog or Structural Member Style Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Structural Member Styles in the Structural Member Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening the Structural Member Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Style from a Shape in the Structural Member Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Locating a Shape in the Structural Member Catalog from a Structural Member in a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening a Catalog File in the Structural Member Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Structural Member Style with the Structural Member Style Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Structural Member Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Beam Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Brace Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Column Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Structural Member Tools to Create Structural Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Beams with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Brace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Brace with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Freestanding Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Freestanding Column with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Grid-Anchored Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Grid-Anchored Columns with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Structural Member from Linework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Structural Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Grips To Edit Structural Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Structural Member Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Structural Member Start and End Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Structural Member Start Point and Endpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Structural Member Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Radius of a Curved Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Curved Structural Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Structural Member Justification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Structural Member Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trimming Structural Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Style of a Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Tool Properties to a Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Cut Plane Display of a Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Display of Custom Block Components of a Structural Member . . . . . . . . Specifying the Offsets for a Structural Member in Plan Low Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, and Files to a Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Structural Member Body Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Body Modifier to a Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subtracting a Body Modifier from a Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a Structural Member with a Body Modifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv | Contents . 1677 . 1680 . 1681 . 1682 . 1682 . 1684 . 1684 . 1684 . 1686 . 1686 . 1690 . 1693 . 1695 . 1696 . 1697 . 1703 . 1704 . 1707 . 1707 . 1710 . 1711 . 1714 . 1715 . 1715 . 1720 . 1721 . 1722 . 1723 . 1724 . 1725 . 1726 . 1727 . 1727 . 1734 . 1734 . 1734 . 1735 . 1736 . 1737 . 1738 . 1738 . 1739 . 1740 Editing the Geometry of a Body Modifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1741 Managing Body Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1742 Restoring a Body Modifier to a Mass Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1743 Working with Structural Member Interference Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1743 Creating Structural Member Interference Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1744 Removing Structural Member Interference Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1745 Editing Structural Member Interference Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1745 Structural Member Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1746 Creating a Structural Member Style in the Style Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1746 Specifying the Materials of a Structural Member Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1747 Specifying the Display Properties of a Structural Member Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1749 Specifying Classifications for a Structural Member Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1756 Defining a Structural Member Style as Bounding for Associative Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . 1756 Attaching Notes and Files to a Structural Member Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1757 Creating Custom Structural Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1757 Understanding the Design Rules of a Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1759 Changing the Shape in the Style of a Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1761 Adding a Shape to a Structural Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1761 Process Overview: Creating a Single-Component Structural Member (Tapered Column) . . . . 1762 Process Overview: Creating a Multi-Component Structural Member (Composite Column) . . 1764 Process Overview: Creating a Multi-Component Structural Member Using Multiple Segments (Rigid Frame) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1766 Creating Custom Shapes for Structural Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1771 Design Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1775 Chapter 30 Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1777 Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Object Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Object Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Releasing Object Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Curve Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Curve Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Position of Objects Anchored to Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anchoring Objects to New Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Leader Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Leader Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Position of Objects Anchored to Layout Nodes with Leader Anchors . Grip-Editing Leaders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extending Leaders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying Objects to All Layout Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Node Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Node Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Position of Objects Anchored to Layout Nodes with Node Anchors . . Anchoring Objects to Different Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying Objects to All Layout Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Cell Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Cell Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Position and Size of Objects Anchored to Layout Cells . . . . . . . . . Anchoring Objects to a Different Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying Objects to All Layout Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Volume Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Volume Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Position and Size of Objects Anchored to Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . Anchoring Objects to a Different Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying Objects to All Layout Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Releasing and Positioning Anchored Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Releasing Anchored Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1777 . 1778 . 1778 . 1779 . 1780 . 1780 . 1781 . 1784 . 1785 . 1785 . 1785 . 1786 . 1787 . 1787 . 1788 . 1788 . 1789 . 1789 . 1790 . 1791 . 1791 . 1792 . 1792 . 1793 . 1793 . 1794 . 1794 . 1795 . 1796 . 1796 . 1796 Contents | xxv Positioning Anchored Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1796 Creating an Anchor Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1797 Chapter 31 Layout Curves and Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1799 Layout Curves and Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Layout Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Layout Curve Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Layout Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Nodes to Layout Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing Nodes from Layout Curves . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Offsets of Layout Curves . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Node Spacing of a Layout Curve . . . . . . Changing the Node Positions on a Layout Curve . . . . . Changing the Spacing Mode of Layout Curves . . . . . . . Switching Layout Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Display Properties of Layout Curves . . . . Changing the Node Radius for a Layout Curve . . . . . . Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Layout Curve . . Using Layout Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Layout Grid Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Radial Layout Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Radial Layout Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Rectangular Layout Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Rectangular Layout Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Grid Lines to Layout Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing Grid Lines from Layout Grids . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Spacing Mode of Layout Grids . . . . . . . Changing the Display Properties of Layout Grids . . . . . Changing the Node Radius for a Layout Grid . . . . . . . Creating and Removing Boundaries for Layout Grids . . . Creating Holes in Layout Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing Holes from Layout Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Location of Layout Grids . . . . . . . . . . Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Layout Grid . . Using Layout Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Layout Volume Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Layout Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Layout Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Grid Lines to Layout Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . Removing Grid Lines from Layout Volumes . . . . . . . . Changing the Spacing Mode of Layout Volumes . . . . . . Changing the Display Properties of Layout Volumes . . . Changing the Node Radius for a Layout Volume . . . . . . Changing the Location of Layout Volumes . . . . . . . . Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Layout Volume . Chapter 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1799 . 1800 . 1800 . 1801 . 1804 . 1804 . 1805 . 1806 . 1806 . 1807 . 1808 . 1808 . 1809 . 1810 . 1810 . 1811 . 1811 . 1813 . 1813 . 1814 . 1814 . 1815 . 1815 . 1816 . 1817 . 1817 . 1818 . 1818 . 1818 . 1819 . 1819 . 1819 . 1821 . 1822 . 1822 . 1822 . 1823 . 1824 . 1824 . 1825 . 1826 Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1827 Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Column Grid Tools to Create Column Grids . . . . . . . Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Column Grid with User-Specified Settings . . . Creating a Column Grid from a Layout Grid . . . . . . . . Creating a Column Grid from Linework . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Column Grid Dynamically . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Structural Column Grid Tool . . . . . . . . . . Working with Column Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Labeling Column Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extending Column Grid Lines Beyond the Grid Boundary xxvi | Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . or Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1827 . 1828 . 1829 . 1829 . 1831 . 1832 . 1832 . 1833 . 1833 . 1833 . 1835 Dimensioning Column Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Column Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Dimensions of a Column Grid . . . . . . Changing the Lines of a Column Grid . . . . . . . . . . Attaching Clipping Profiles to Column Grids . . . . . . Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Column Grid . Changing the Location of Column Grids . . . . . . . . Changing the Display of Column Grids . . . . . . . . . Changing the Node Radius for a Column Grid . . . . . . Using Ceiling Grid Tools to Create Ceiling Grids . . . . . . . . Creating a Ceiling Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Ceiling Grid with User-Specified Settings . . . Creating a Ceiling Grid from a Layout Grid . . . . . . . Creating a Ceiling Grid from Linework . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Ceiling Grid Dynamically . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Ceiling Grid with a Clipping Boundary . . . Creating a Ceiling Grid Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Ceiling Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Dimensions of a Ceiling Grid . . . . . . . Changing the Lines of a Ceiling Grid . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching Clipping Profiles to Ceiling Grids . . . . . . . Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Ceiling Grid . Changing the Location of Ceiling Grids . . . . . . . . . Changing the Display of Ceiling Grids . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Node Radius for a Ceiling Grid . . . . . . Chapter 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1835 . 1836 . 1836 . 1836 . 1841 . 1842 . 1842 . 1843 . 1844 . 1844 . 1845 . 1845 . 1847 . 1847 . 1847 . 1848 . 1849 . 1850 . 1850 . 1850 . 1855 . 1856 . 1857 . 1858 . 1858 Detail Drafting Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1861 Construction Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Construction Lines From Existing Objects/Linework . Creating Construction Lines Independently . . . . . . . . . . . Hatch Productivity Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repositioning a Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generating a Hatch Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redefining a Hatch Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AEC Modify Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trimming Linework or Profile-Based Objects . . . . . . . . . . . Trimming Linework or Profile-Based Objects to an Edge . . . . . Extending Linework to an Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dividing Linework and Profile-Based Objects . . . . . . . . . . Subtracting from Linework and Profile-Based Objects . . . . . . Obscuring Regions of Linework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Merging Linework or Profile-Based Objects . . . . . . . . . . . Cropping Linework or Profile-Based Objects . . . . . . . . . . . Shrinkwrapping Linework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repositioning from a Reference Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Evenly Spacing Linework or Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Centering Linework or Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1861 . 1861 . 1863 . 1863 . 1864 . 1864 . 1865 . 1868 . 1868 . 1869 . 1870 . 1871 . 1872 . 1873 . 1874 . 1875 . 1875 . 1876 . 1877 . 1877 . 1877 Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1879 Mask Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Mask Block Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mask Block Definition from a Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mask Block Definition from an Existing Mask Block Definition . Importing Mask Block Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Mask Block Definitions to a New Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Mask Block Definitions to an Existing Drawing . . . . . . . . . Editing a Mask Block Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1879 . 1880 . 1880 . 1880 . 1881 . 1881 . 1882 . 1882 Contents | xxvii Adding Classifications to a Mask Block Definition . . . . . . . . Purging Mask Block Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mask Block Tools to Create Mask Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Mask Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Mask Block with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . Creating a Mask Block from Polylines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mask Block Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching Mask Blocks to Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detaching Mask Blocks from Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Mask Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Grips to Move Mask Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Location of a Mask Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing the Profile of a Mask Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Tool Properties to an Existing Mask Block Reference . Changing Display Properties of Mask Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, and Files to a Mask Block . . . . . Chapter 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1883 . 1884 . 1884 . 1885 . 1885 . 1886 . 1886 . 1888 . 1889 . 1889 . 1890 . 1890 . 1891 . 1892 . 1892 . 1893 Multi-View Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1895 Multi-View Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multi-View Block Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process Overview: Creating Multi-View Block Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . Creating View Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Multi-View Block Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting View Blocks to View Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining a Multi-View Block Definition as Bounding for Associative Spaces . Attaching Notes and Files to a Multi-View Block Definition . . . . . . . . . . Adding Classifications to a Multi-View Block Definition . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Multi-View Block Definition to DesignCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Multi-View Block Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Multi-View Blocks to a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting a Multi-View Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Multi-View Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Rotation of a Multi-View Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Associated Multi-View Block Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Scale Factor of a Multi-View Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Offset of a Multi-View Block Using Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Location of a Multi-View Block Using Grips . . . . . . . . . . Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Multi-View Block . . . . . . . . . . Editing the Location and Rotation of Attributes in a Multi-View Block . . . . Updating Multi-View Block Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1895 . 1896 . 1896 . 1897 . 1898 . 1899 . 1899 . 1900 . 1900 . 1901 . 1902 . 1904 . 1904 . 1905 . 1905 . 1906 . 1906 . 1906 . 1907 . 1908 . 1909 . 1910 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1911 Chapter 36 Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1913 New Features in Spaces for AutoCAD Architecture 2009 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Space Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Space Workflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Associative Spaces - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with List Definitions - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Space Boundaries - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Zones - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Calculation Modifiers - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Calculation Cut Planes - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Space Evaluations - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving Forward to AutoCAD Architecture 2009 from Autodesk Architectural Desktop 2006 and Earlier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto-Converting Legacy Areas to Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Space Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviii | Contents . . . . . . . . . . . 1913 . 1914 . 1916 . 1916 . 1916 . 1917 . 1919 . 1920 . 1921 . 1922 . . 1923 . . 1925 . . 1926 Using Space Tools to Create Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generating Associative Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boundary Objects for Associative Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generating an Associative Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generating Associative Spaces from Xrefs and Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Defining a Maximum Gap Size for Associative Spaces . . . . . . . . . . Updating Associative Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activating and Deactivating Automatic Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manually Updating Associative Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Merging Associative Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dividing an Associative Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deducting Spaces from an Associative Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Making a Space Associative or Non-Associative . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting Associative Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Non-Associative Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Non-Associative 2D or Extruded 3D Space . . . . . . . . . . Converting Objects, Profiles, and Polylines to Non-Associative Spaces . Creating a Space Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing General Space Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Renaming a Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Style of a Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Location of a Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Decomposition Type for a Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Decomposition Text Properties for a Space . . . . . . . . Specifying the Cut Plane Display of a Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Space Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Manual Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Style-Based Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Boundaries Based on an Area Calculation Standard . . . Defining the Boundary Offset Type of a Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying an Area Calculation Standard for a Drawing . . . . . . . . . Classifying a Space According to an Area Calculation Standard . . . . . Changing the Area Calculation Standard for Existing Spaces . . . . . . Working with Drawings with Different Area Calculation Standards . . . User-Defined Area Calculation Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Space Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Type of a Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Space Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Height of Extruded 3D Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Height of 3D Freeform Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Height of Space Surfaces (Extruded 3D Spaces) . . . . . . Boolean Operations for Extruded 3D Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Interference Conditions for Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing Interference Conditions from Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . Merging Extruded 3D Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dividing Extruded 3D Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Holes in Extruded 3D Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Spaces from the Intersection of Other Spaces . . . . . . . . . Trimming an Extruded 3D Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing Voids from Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reversing Space Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reversing All Rings in a Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boolean Operations for 3D Freeform Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trimming 3D Freeform Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Splitting Surfaces of 3D Freeform Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Surfaces of 3D Freeform Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Merging 3D Freeform Spaces with AEC Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subtracting AEC Objects from 3D Freeform Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . Intersecting 3D Freeform Spaces with AEC Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1930 . 1931 . 1931 . 1938 . 1941 . 1944 . 1945 . 1946 . 1947 . 1948 . 1950 . 1951 . 1952 . 1953 . 1958 . 1958 . 1961 . 1964 . 1967 . 1967 . 1968 . 1968 . 1969 . 1970 . 1972 . 1972 . 1973 . 1974 . 1975 . 1975 . 1976 . 1977 . 1978 . 1979 . 1979 . 1980 . 1980 . 1989 . 1991 . 1992 . 1992 . 1994 . 1995 . 1995 . 1996 . 1996 . 1999 . 2000 . 2001 . 2004 . 2005 . 2006 . 2006 . 2006 . 2006 . 2007 . 2008 . 2009 . 2010 . 2010 Contents | xxix Grip-Editing the Surfaces of 3D Freeform Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2011 Editing Space Surface Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2014 Opening the Space/Zone Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2014 Editing Surface Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2016 Editing Ceiling and Floor Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2017 Working with Surface Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2018 Setting Up Adjacency Relations between Space Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2037 Displaying Adjacency Relations between Space Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2038 Space Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2039 Creating a Space Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2039 Specifying Target Dimensions for the Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2040 Specifying Space Boundary Offsets in a Space Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2041 Attaching a List Definition to a Space Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2042 Specifying Classifications for a Space Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2042 Specifying the Materials of a Space Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2043 Specifying the Display Properties of a Space Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2045 Specifying the Hatching for Components of a Space Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2047 Setting the Object Cut Plane of a Space Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2048 Attaching Notes and Files to a Space Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2049 Converting Area Styles to Space Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2049 List Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2051 Creating a List Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2052 Specifying the Application for a List Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2052 Editing a List Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2053 Attaching Notes and Files to a List Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2053 Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2054 Using Zone Tools to Create Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2055 Zone Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2055 Creating a Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2057 Creating Zones with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2058 Creating Zone Structures from a Zone Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2059 Creating a Zone Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2060 Converting Area Groups to Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2061 Zones and Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2063 Attaching Spaces and Zones to Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2063 Detaching Spaces and Zones from Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2064 Selecting Spaces and Zones Attached to a Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2064 Editing Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2064 Renaming a Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2064 Changing the Zone Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2065 Changing the Zone Boundary Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2065 Changing the Content Rules of a Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2066 Changing the Calculation Type of a Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2066 Changing Calculation Modifiers for a Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2067 Ordering Zone Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2067 Creating Polylines from Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2068 Specifying Additional Display Properties for a Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2069 Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to a Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2070 Zone Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2071 Creating a Zone Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2071 Attaching a List Definition to a Zone Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2072 Restricting the Content of a Zone Based on the Zone Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2073 Specifying Classifications for a Zone Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2073 Specifying the Display Properties of a Zone Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2073 Attaching Notes or Files to a Zone Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2077 Converting Area Group Styles to Zone Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2078 Zone Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2079 Creating a Zone Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2080 Building the Structure of a Zone Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2080 Attaching Notes and Files to a Zone Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2082 xxx | Contents Converting Area Group Templates to Zone Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Space Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schedule Properties of Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculation Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Calculation Cut Planes for 3D Freeform Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generating Output Data and Exporting Space Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Space Decomposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Space Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Spaces for Load Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conversion of Space Boundaries to Walls and Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix 1: Command Changes for Spaces and Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Area Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Area Group Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Space Boundary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix 2: Predefined Area Calculation Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating Spaces Based on the Basic Area Calculation Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating Spaces Based on the DIN 277 Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating Spaces Based on the SIS Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating Spaces Based on the BOMA Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix 3: Implementing an Area Calculation Standard Plug-in with the AutoCAD Architecture .NET API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Implementing an Area Calculation Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Implementing Offset Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 37 . 2083 . 2083 . 2084 . 2088 . 2092 . 2092 . 2093 . 2097 . 2105 . 2110 . 2110 . 2110 . 2112 . 2113 . 2114 . 2114 . 2115 . 2118 . 2122 . 2126 . 2126 . 2131 Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2147 Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process Overview: Creating a 2D or 3D Section . . . . . . . . . . . . Process Overview: Creating a Live Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing and Editing Section Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Section Line and Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Height of a Section Using Grips . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Lower Extension of a Section Using Grips . . . . Changing the Length of a Section Using Grips . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Angle Dimensions of a Section . . . . . . . . . . Creating Graphic Subdivisions for 2D and 3D Sections . . . . . Changing a Subdivision Using Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Section Mark Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Location of a Section Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Section Line Using Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, and Files to a Section Line . . . . Creating a 2D or 3D Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Horizontal 2D Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Editing a Live Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Live Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating a Live Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying the Sectioned Body in a Live Section View . . . . . . Removing a Live Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a 2D or 3D Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Grips to Edit Linework in a 2D Section . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Display of Graphic Subdivisions in a 2D Section . Changing the Display of Graphic Subdivisions in a 3D Section . Reversing a 2D or 3D Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Style of a 2D Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Boundary in a 2D Section . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Material Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing and Merging Linework in a 2D Section . . . . . . . . . Changing the Location of a 2D or 3D Section . . . . . . . . . . Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, and Files to a 2D or 3D Section . . Updating a 2D or 3D Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2147 . 2151 . 2153 . 2153 . 2155 . 2156 . 2157 . 2157 . 2159 . 2159 . 2160 . 2160 . 2160 . 2161 . 2162 . 2162 . 2164 . 2165 . 2166 . 2166 . 2167 . 2168 . 2168 . 2168 . 2169 . 2170 . 2171 . 2171 . 2172 . 2172 . 2175 . 2176 . 2177 . 2177 Contents | xxxi Globally Updating 2D Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supported Project Drawing Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Globally Updating 2D Sections and Elevations in a Project or a Folder . . Updating Legacy Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D Section Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a 2D Section Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Display Component to a 2D Section Style . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a Display Component from a 2D Section Style . . . . . . . . . About 2D and 3D Section Display Components and Materials . . . . . . Use Subdivision Properties and Materials in 2D Section Styles . . . . . . Use the 3D Body Component of a Material for the 2D Section Linework . Adding a Design Rule to a 2D Section Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing a Design Rule in a 2D Section Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a Design Rule from a 2D Section Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Classifications to a 2D Section Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Layer, Color, and Linetype of a 2D Section Style . . . . . . Attaching Notes and Files to a 2D Section Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2178 . 2179 . 2179 . 2181 . 2181 . 2182 . 2183 . 2184 . 2184 . 2189 . 2189 . 2190 . 2191 . 2192 . 2192 . 2192 . 2193 Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2195 Working With Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process Overview: Creating a 2D or 3D Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing and Editing Elevation Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing an Elevation Line and Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Height of an Elevation Using Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Lower Extension of an Elevation Using Grips . . . . . . . Changing the Length of an Elevation Using Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Angle Dimensions of an Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Graphic Subdivisions for 2D and 3D Elevations . . . . . . . . . Changing Elevation Mark Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Location of an Elevation Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying an Elevation Line Using Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes and Files to an Elevation Line . . . . . . . . Creating a 2D or 3D Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Horizontal 2D Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a 2D or 3D Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Grips to Edit Linework in a 2D Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Display of Graphic Subdivisions in a 2D Elevation . . . . . Changing the Display of Graphic Subdivisions in a 3D Elevation . . . . . Reversing a 2D or 3D Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Style of a 2D Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding and Removing Custom Components for an Elevation . . . . . . Specifying the Display of Surface Hatching for an Elevation Subdivision . Specifying the Display of 2D Linework for an Elevation . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Boundary in a 2D Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Material Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing and Merging Linework in a 2D Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Location of a 2D or 3D Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, and Files to a 2D or 3D Elevation . . . . . . Updating a 2D or 3D Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Globally Updating 2D Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supported Project Drawing Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Globally Updating 2D Sections and Elevations in a Project or a Folder . . Updating Legacy Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D Elevation Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a 2D Elevation Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Display Component to a 2D Elevation Style . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a Display Component from a 2D Elevation Style . . . . . . . . About 2D and 3D Elevation Display Components and Materials . . . . . Use Subdivision Properties and Materials in 2D Elevation Styles . . . . . xxxii | Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2195 . 2199 . 2201 . 2203 . 2204 . 2205 . 2206 . 2207 . 2207 . 2208 . 2208 . 2209 . 2210 . 2210 . 2211 . 2212 . 2213 . 2214 . 2215 . 2216 . 2216 . 2216 . 2217 . 2219 . 2219 . 2220 . 2223 . 2224 . 2224 . 2225 . 2226 . 2227 . 2227 . 2228 . 2229 . 2230 . 2231 . 2232 . 2232 . 2235 Use the 3D Body Component of a Material for the 2D Elevation Linework . Adding a Design Rule to a 2D Elevation Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing a Design Rule in a 2D Elevation Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a Design Rule from a 2D Elevation Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Classifications to a 2D Elevation Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Layer, Color, and Linetype of a 2D Elevation Style . . . . . . Attaching Notes and Files to a 2D Elevation Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2235 . 2236 . 2237 . 2237 . 2237 . 2238 . 2239 Hidden Line Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2241 Hidden Line Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2241 Creating a Hidden Line Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2241 Chapter 40 AEC Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2243 AEC Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Options and Uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Associative Dimensions from Selecting Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Associative Dimensions from Picked Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-Associative Dimensions from Picked Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AutoCAD Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process Overview: Creating AEC Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Associative Dimensions from Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Points for Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Points for Wall Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Points for Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Points for Other Object Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AutoCAD Dimension Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Associative Dimensions in External References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Associative Dimensions From Picked Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying AEC Dimension Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating AEC Dimensions Using AEC Dimension Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an AEC Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an AEC Dimension with User-Specified Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Cases for AEC Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Converting an AutoCAD Dimension to an AEC Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying Properties of AEC Dimensions to AutoCAD Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an AEC Dimension Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing AEC Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Points to an AEC Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detaching Dimension Points from an AEC Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restoring Object Points Set in the AEC Dimension Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing Non-Style Defined Dimension Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reversing the Direction of an AEC Wall Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overriding Associative Wall Component Dimension Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repositioning Dimension Texts, Extension Lines, and Dimension Chains . . . . . Resetting Repositioned Dimension Texts, Extension Lines and Dimension Chains . Overriding Dimension Values and Hiding Dimension Segments . . . . . . . . . . Changing the AEC Dimension Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Object Dimension Points for an AEC Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the AutoCAD Style and Other Properties for an AEC Dimension . . . . Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, and Files to an AEC Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . AEC Dimension Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AEC Dimension Styles and AutoCAD Dimension Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The AEC Dimension Style Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating AutoCAD Dimension Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an AEC Dimension Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Number of Chains in an AEC Dimension Style . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the AEC Dimension Display Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Dimensioned Objects in the AEC Dimension Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2243 . 2244 . 2244 . 2245 . 2246 . 2246 . 2246 . 2247 . 2247 . 2249 . 2250 . 2250 . 2251 . 2253 . 2253 . 2254 . 2256 . 2257 . 2257 . 2259 . 2265 . 2266 . 2267 . 2268 . 2268 . 2272 . 2273 . 2274 . 2275 . 2276 . 2279 . 2280 . 2282 . 2284 . 2285 . 2286 . 2288 . 2288 . 2288 . 2289 . 2289 . 2290 . 2291 . 2291 . 2292 Contents | xxxiii Specifying Object Dimension Points in AEC Dimension Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the AutoCAD Dimension Styles and Other Properties of AEC Dimension Styles . Changing Style Properties with the AEC Dimension Style Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching Notes and Files to an AEC Dimension Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q and A for Working with AEC Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Color, Text Size and Arrowheads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating AEC Dimensions On Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Text Height of Superscripted Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixing the Error Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finding More Dimension Points than Expected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2301 . 2302 . 2302 . 2303 . 2304 . 2304 . 2305 . 2305 . 2305 . 2305 . 2306 . 2306 . 2306 . 2307 . 2307 . 2308 . 2308 . 2309 . 2309 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2311 Fields Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting Fields in a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting Fields in Property Set Definitions . . . . Inserting Field Placeholders in Object Properties . Adding Fields to Object Style Properties . . . . . Inserting Fields in AutoCAD Text Elements . . . Editing Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing the Field Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Converting Fields to Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AutoCAD Architecture Field Types . . . . . . . . . . . Project Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Project Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sheet Set Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Sheet Set Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynote Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Keynote Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . Database Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Database Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Data Link to an ODBC Source . . . . . Chapter 43 . 2293 . 2294 . 2296 . 2298 . 2299 . 2299 . 2299 . 2299 . 2300 . 2300 Elevation Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2301 Elevation Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Elevation Label Tools to Create Elevation Labels . . . . . . . Creating an Elevation Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation Labels with User-Specified Settings . . . . Creating an Elevation Label Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Elevation Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Elevation of an Elevation Label . . . . . . . . . Changing the Coordinate System of an Elevation Label . . . . Changing the Associated Multi-View Block Definition . . . . Changing the Scale Factor of an Elevation Label . . . . . . . . Changing the Offset of an Elevation Label . . . . . . . . . . . Display the View Blocks and Attributes of an Elevation Label . Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, or Files to an Elevation Label . . Creating User-Defined Elevation Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Graphic Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Multi-View Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Elevation Label to the AutoCAD DesignCenter . . Chapter 42 . . . . . . . . . . Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2311 . 2312 . 2312 . 2313 . 2315 . 2317 . 2317 . 2320 . 2322 . 2322 . 2322 . 2323 . 2323 . 2323 . 2324 . 2326 . 2327 . 2328 . 2329 . 2330 . 2332 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2339 Understanding Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2339 Inserting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2340 xxxiv | Contents Stamp Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linear Array Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backfill Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bookends Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Countable Linear Array Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surface Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dynamically Sized Surface Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bolt Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Detail Components in a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Detail Component Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Component Tools to a Tool Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Detail Component Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Detail Component Properties to Linework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Detail Component Properties to Linework from a Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Detail Component Properties to Linework from the Detail Component Manager . Using the Detail Component Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Locating a Detail Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Modifying Detail Component Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Detail Component Database Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Detail Component Database to Available Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a Detail Component Database from Available Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Detail Component Database Permissions in a Multi-User Environment . . . . . . . . . . Merging Old and New Detail Component Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 44 . 2341 . 2341 . 2342 . 2343 . 2344 . 2345 . 2346 . 2347 . 2347 . 2349 . 2349 . 2351 . 2353 . 2353 . 2354 . 2354 . 2355 . 2357 . 2378 . 2378 . 2379 . 2379 . 2380 Annotation and Keynoting Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2381 The Basic Annotation Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Text-Only Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Text with Single Leader Annotation . . . . . . . Adding and Removing Leader Lines from Leaders . . . . . Creating a Break Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Block-Based Annotation with a Leader . . . . . Editing a Text-Based Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Masking Break Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Block-Based Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynoting Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the Annotation Tool for Keynoting . . . . . . Using Keynote Insertion Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Keynote Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing and Editing Keynotes in a Drawing . . . . . . . . Specifying Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Keynote Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . North Arrow and Datum Point Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting a North Arrow or Datum Point in the Drawing . Fire Rating Line Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting a Fire Rating Line in the Drawing . . . . . . . . Match Line Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting a Match Line in the Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . Revision Cloud Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting a Revision Cloud in the Drawing . . . . . . . . . Bar Scale Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting a Bar Scale in the Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . Column Grid Bubble Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting a Column Grid Bubble in the Drawing . . . . . . Editing Annotation Symbols in the Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Block-Based Annotation Symbols . . . . . . . . . Editing Polyline-Based Annotation Symbols . . . . . . . . Annotation Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2381 . 2391 . 2391 . 2392 . 2394 . 2394 . 2395 . 2396 . 2396 . 2397 . 2397 . 2399 . 2402 . 2408 . 2411 . 2413 . 2426 . 2427 . 2428 . 2429 . 2429 . 2431 . 2431 . 2433 . 2433 . 2434 . 2435 . 2436 . 2437 . 2437 . 2439 . 2441 Contents | xxxv Chapter 45 Callouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2449 Working with Callouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Callout Tools in AutoCAD Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process Overview: Placing a Callout . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Properties of a Callout Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Properties of a Callout Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Title Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing a Title Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Detail Callouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in the Current View Drawing . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in an Existing Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a New Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Section Callouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Section in the Current Drawing . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Section in an Existing Drawing . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Section in a New Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Elevation Callouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing a Single Elevation Callout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing a Four-Way Interior Elevation Callout . . . . . . . . Placing a Four-Way Exterior Elevation Callout . . . . . . . . Placing a Callout Without a Model Space View . . . . . . . . . . Referencing a Callout to an Existing View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening a Model Space View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Model Space View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resolving Fields in Callout Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Callouts Outside a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing a Callout in a Non-Project Drawing File . . . . . . . Opening Model Space Views in a Non-Project Drawing File . Deleting Model Space Views in a Non-Project Drawing File . Creating New Callout Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Fields in Callout Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Callout Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2449 . 2451 . 2454 . 2455 . 2460 . 2461 . 2461 . 2461 . 2462 . 2464 . 2465 . 2466 . 2467 . 2468 . 2469 . 2471 . 2471 . 2472 . 2474 . 2475 . 2476 . 2477 . 2478 . 2478 . 2479 . 2479 . 2480 . 2481 . 2481 . 2481 . 2482 Schedules and Display Themes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2485 Overview of Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schedule Table Terminology in AutoCAD Architecture 2009 . Process Overview: Using Schedule Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . Property Sets and Property Set Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Schedules Using Schedule Table Tools . . . . . . . . . Creating a Schedule Table Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Objects to a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing Objects from a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reselecting Objects for a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turning Off the Out-of-Date Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating a Schedule Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Locating and Viewing Scheduled Objects in a Drawing . . . . Schedule Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Tags Using Schedule Tag Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Schedule Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Schedule Tag Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anchoring an Existing Schedule Tag to an Object . . . . . . . Releasing an Anchored Schedule Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing the Connection Between Tags and Objects . . . . . . Renumbering Property Set Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Schedule Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Schedule Table Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxvi | Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2485 . 2486 . 2487 . 2488 . 2491 . 2491 . 2492 . 2493 . 2494 . 2494 . 2494 . 2494 . 2495 . 2495 . 2495 . 2499 . 2500 . 2503 . 2503 . 2503 . 2504 . 2505 . 2506 . 2521 Exporting Schedule Data for Selected Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Display Properties of a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing General Schedule Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Selection Criteria for a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Location of a Schedule Using Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing External Source Properties of a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Table Breaks to a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Documentation Information to a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Table Cell Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Set Data to All Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Property Data Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expanding the Scope of Scheduled Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Property Set Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching Property Set Data to Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Manual Properties and Fields for Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing or Updating Fields in Manual Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Converting Fields in Manual Properties to Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing Property Set Data from an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching Property Set Data to Styles and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Manual Properties and Fields for Styles and Definitions . . . . . . . Editing Style-Based Property Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Style-Based Property Sets Attached to Objects in External References . Removing Property Set Data from a Style or Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . Browsing Property Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Property Set Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Automatic Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Property Set Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching Notes or Reference Files to a Property Set Definition . . . . . . . . Specifying How the Property Set Definition is Applied . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Manual Property Definition to a Property Set Definition . . . . . . Adding a Field to a Property Set Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Automatic Property Definition to a Property Set Definition . . . . Adding a Location Property Definition to a Property Set Definition . . . . . Adding a Classification Property Definition to a Property Set Definition . . . Adding a Material Property Definition to a Property Set Definition . . . . . . Adding a Project Property Definition to a Property Set Definition . . . . . . Adding an Anchor Property Definition to a Property Set Definition . . . . . Adding a Graphic Property Definition to a Property Set Definition . . . . . . Sequencing Property Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hiding Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Property Set Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing All Property Sets from Objects and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Merging Property Set Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a List Definition for a Manual Property Definition . . . . . . . . . . Editing List Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the List Item for an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching Notes or Reference Files to a List Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . Classification Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process Overview: Including Classification Data in Schedules . . . . . . . . . A Classification Use Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Classification Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the Object Types for a Classification Definition . . . . . . . . . . Adding Classifications to a Classification Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching Property Set Definitions to a Classification Definition . . . . . . . Editing a Classification Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Classification of an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching Notes and Files to a Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Themes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2521 . 2522 . 2523 . 2523 . 2524 . 2524 . 2525 . 2526 . 2526 . 2528 . 2528 . 2533 . 2534 . 2534 . 2535 . 2536 . 2536 . 2536 . 2536 . 2537 . 2538 . 2539 . 2540 . 2540 . 2542 . 2544 . 2546 . 2554 . 2554 . 2555 . 2556 . 2558 . 2559 . 2560 . 2561 . 2563 . 2564 . 2565 . 2566 . 2567 . 2568 . 2568 . 2571 . 2571 . 2572 . 2572 . 2573 . 2573 . 2574 . 2574 . 2575 . 2576 . 2578 . 2579 . 2579 . 2580 . 2581 . 2582 . 2583 . 2583 Contents | xxxvii Process Overview: Creating Display Themes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Editing Display Themes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Display Theme Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Display Theme to a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disabling Display Themes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activating Display Themes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Theme Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Display Theme Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting Schedule Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Question Marks in Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Object not Listed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Which Property Sets to Attach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Data in the Schedule Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . Object Numbers Out of Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Locating an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting an Empty Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INVALID in a Table Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting Schedule Table Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Column Button Unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Property Sets Unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quantity Column not Totalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Matrix Column Displaying Data Instead of a Matrix Symbol . Troubleshooting Classification Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Empty Classification Tab in Style Properties . . . . . . . . . . Long Title for a Classification Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . Classifications Property to a Property Set Definition . . . . . . Including Classifications in a Schedule Table . . . . . . . . . Objects Not Included in the Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . Classifications Selected but Object Not Included . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting Schedule Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Difference Between Schedule Tags and Project Schedule Tags . Troubleshooting Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Values on the Extended Data Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2584 . 2584 . 2586 . 2587 . 2588 . 2588 . 2589 . 2590 . 2592 . 2592 . 2592 . 2592 . 2593 . 2593 . 2593 . 2593 . 2594 . 2594 . 2594 . 2594 . 2594 . 2594 . 2595 . 2595 . 2595 . 2595 . 2595 . 2596 . 2596 . 2596 . 2596 . 2596 . 2596 AEC Content and DesignCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2599 Overview of AEC Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Predefined AEC Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AEC Content in the Content Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AEC Content in DesignCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding AEC Content to Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Content from the Content Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Content from DesignCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Fixture Layouts from DesignCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving Content Between DesignCenter and the Content Browser . . . Creating a Tool from AEC Content in DesignCenter . . . . . . . . Creating Custom AEC Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the AEC Content Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing AEC Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying DesignCenter Content with the AEC Content Wizard . Modifying Fixture Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turning Off the Dimension Scale Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2599 . 2600 . 2600 . 2600 . 2602 . 2602 . 2603 . 2603 . 2604 . 2604 . 2605 . 2605 . 2614 . 2614 . 2614 . 2615 Other Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2617 Chapter 48 Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2619 Adjusting the Camera Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2619 xxxviii | Contents Chapter 49 Converting Objects to 3D Solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2621 Converting Objects to 3D Solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2621 Converting Objects to 3D Solid Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2621 Chapter 50 Visual Audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2623 Working with Visual Audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2623 Performing a Visual Audit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2624 Chapter 51 Reference AEC Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2625 Creating an AEC Entity Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Reference to an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attaching an Object to an Existing Entity Reference . . . . . . . Attaching Hyperlinks, Notes, and Files to an Entity Reference . Changing the Location of an Entity Reference . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2625 . 2625 . 2626 . 2626 . 2627 Customizing and Adding New Content for Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2629 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A Walkthrough of the Process . . . . . Component Databases . . . . . . . . Recipe Specifications . . . . . . . . . Jigs and JigEnts . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Jigs . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recipe Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . Blocks and Block Libraries . . . . . . Using Optimal Geometry . . . . Naming Blocks . . . . . . . . . Base Points for Blocks . . . . . . Collecting Similar Blocks . . . . Block Properties . . . . . . . . . Layer Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing Unnecessary Objects . Chapter 53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2629 . 2630 . 2632 . 2635 . 2649 . 2651 . 2656 . 2660 . 2661 . 2662 . 2662 . 2662 . 2663 . 2663 . 2663 Migrating Detail Component and Keynote Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2665 Migrating Your Database Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2665 Running the Detail Component/Keynote Database Migration Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2666 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2669 Contents | xxxix xl Workflow and User Interface 1 2 New Features and Introduction 1 Welcome to AutoCAD Architecture 2009! Built on the new AutoCAD® 2009 platform, this release is targeted at boosting efficiency with user interface enhancements that increase overall drafting productivity by decreasing the number of steps to reach a command. Performance acceleration further enhances the workflows of your building model. Newly designed features simplify working with your design whether you are currently using or new to AutoCAD Architecture. New Features in AutoCAD Architecture 2009 AutoCAD Architecture 2009 is oriented around 3 main themes: ■ Draw more efficiently with tools that automate your most common drafting and documentation tasks ■ Annotate your designs faster with streamlined tools that reduce the workload of drafting ■ Collaborate with members of your extended project team as smoothly as possible User Interface The AutoCAD Architecture 2009 user interface offers a new look and feel. It provides you with easy access to the most commonly used tools while maximizing the drawing area. The default application window includes the Menu Browser, Quick Access toolbar, InfoCenter, and Status bar. 3 The main components in the application window are: ■ Menu Browser: The new menu browser provides easy access to a variety of content, including commands and documents, from a single button in the upper left corner of the application window. Use the menu browser to preview and open documents, to search for commands and tags, and to display extended tooltips. ■ Quick Access Toolbar: The Quick Access Toolbar is displayed at the top of the application window, next to the menu browser. By default, it includes the most common tools such as New, Open, Save, Plot, Project Navigator, Project Browser, Undo, and Redo. You can add and remove tools easily. Drag and drop commands from the Command list onto the Quick Access toolbar. The Quick Access tools can be reorganized or removed for each workspace. ■ Ribbon: In AutoCAD Architecture 2009, the Ribbon is displayed with the Visualization workspace. 4 | Chapter 1 New Features and Introduction The Ribbon provides easy access to AutoCAD tools through a collection of tabs and panels. Each tab contains multiple panels and each panel contains multiple tools. Some panels can be expanded to access additional tools. ■ InfoCenter: The InfoCenter has been enhanced to provide more flexibility when searching for help. You can collapse or expand the search field, saving space on the title bar. And when searching the help system for a topic, you can specify which document to search; decreasing the amount of time you spend trying to locate a topic. In addition, InfoCenter displays Did You Know balloons for selected feature areas. Did You Know balloons provide Knowledge Base information and general instructional messages such as tips. You can click on the text or the Expand icon to expand the balloon to view the detailed information. For a detailed description of the new user interface, see Workspace Components on page 36. ■ Properties Palette: Object display properties formerly modifiable only through the Display Manager are now easily accessible from the Display Tab of the Properties Palette. From this tab you can quickly change visibility and other settings for individual display components in the current display representation. You specify whether your changes will apply to all objects of the selected type (drawing default), all objects of the same style as the one to which the component belongs (a style override), or only that object itself (an object override). You can also apply your changes to other display representations that use the same display component to draw the selected component. The visibility of components can be controlled with the Light Bulb control. User Interface | 5 For a detailed description, see Using the Properties Palette to Change Display Properties on page 538. ■ Enhanced Tooltips: New tooltips have been added to the design environment, giving you helpful hints about how to use the tools within the program without leaving your project. With rollover functionality, multilevel support, and context-sensitive behavior embedded in the user interface, you’ll find it easier to locate the tools you need in order to perform your work faster. ■ Solution Tips: Warning symbols and defect markers used in previous versions of the program have been consolidated and standardized. The new solution tip icons display in the drawing area to alert you to problem conditions in AEC objects. 6 | Chapter 1 New Features and Introduction When you move the cursor over the icon, the solution tip displays, suggesting corrective action and providing a link to more detailed Help when applicable. You can specify whether to display the solution tip icons when drawing, or when publishing/plotting. For more information, see Solution Tips on page 57. Drawing Management Enhancements Now you can get previews of each drawing that include a thumbnail of the design and the status of the drawing. In addition to an indication of the drawings that are currently in use with the lock icon, you can see who on your team has a drawing open in case you need to ask them to close it for editing purposes. A number of additional improvements have been added to Drawing Management: ■ You can now better control how drawings are pathed for storage and external references. If you do not want to repath a file immediately, the Repath queue is saved for later repathing. An Undo function has been added when deleting files from the repath queue. ■ From Project Navigator you can close individual project files, or all files in a project at once by clicking the Close Current Project button. ■ Commas, ampersands and semicolons allowed in titles of sheets. For more information about these and more enhancements, see Drawing Management on page 217. Drawing Management Enhancements | 7 Wall Enhancements In this release a number of key improvements have been made to the Walls feature in order to make them even more powerful and efficient to use. Drawing Walls Enhancements to wall layout functionality give you the ability to quickly change a wall’s justification, direction, and offset distance during insertion. ■ Changing the orientation of a wall segment while drawing it: You can change the orientation of a wall segment about its justification line by first specifying the start point of the wall segment, then pressing CTRL to flip the wall segment about its justification line. End the command by specifying the wall segment endpoint. ■ Changing the justification of a wall segment while drawing it: You can change the justification of a wall segment about its justification line by first specifying the start point of the wall segment, entering J (for Justification) on the command line, and then entering L (for Left), C (for Center), R (for Right), or B (for Baseline) to specify the appropriate justification. End the command by specifying the wall segment endpoint. 8 | Chapter 1 New Features and Introduction ■ Repositioning a wall segment while drawing it: You can reposition a wall segment as you are drawing it by specifying an offset based on a wall component's face or center, or the overall center of the wall. When you move your cursor over the wall segment, assistant lines with a tooltip display to indicate which part of the particular wall segment is selected. A solid line indicates a component face, a dashed line indicates a component center, and a center line indicates the overall center of the wall. Once you specify the wall segment start point and the offset from point, specify the offset distance to reposition the wall segment. End the command by specifying the wall segment endpoint. Wall Enhancements | 9 Wall Cleanup Wall cleanup behavior, both in current drawings and across external references, has been dramatically improved. As a result, you should see fewer Solution Tip Indicators (previously known as defect markers), especially when laying out more complex wall configurations. For more information, see Specifying the Cleanup of Walls on page 830. Wall Endcaps Working with wall endcaps has been improved from previous versions and work now more intuitively and direct. You can use in-place edit grips to modify wall endcaps and create the wall endcap conditions that you want. Vertex and Edge grips are displayed for all wall components at the wall endcap that you specify. In previous versions of AutoCAD Architecture the Calculate Automatically feature worked only for “ideal” polylines, i.e. polylines that started at the wall component corner on the y axis and ended at the other wall component corner on the y axis, so that both the polyline start point and endpoint were coincident with the y axis, and both had the same x value. Now, Calculate Automatically will add boundary segments to complete an endcap configuration if the initial polyline is drawn with regard to location and orientation of the particular wall component. For more information, see Creating Wall Endcaps Using Calculate Automatically on page 902. You can now use AEC Modify Tools to manipulate wall components to create appropriate wall endcap configurations. Use Trim, Extend, Subtract, and Merge tools as necessary to do this. You can modify single wall components or you can modify all components at your wall endcap or opening at once. In each case, you will be using the In-Place Edit feature as you modify the wall components to create your wall endcap condition. 10 | Chapter 1 New Features and Introduction Extending Wall Endcap Components Subtracting from Wall Endcap Components For more information, see Modifying Wall Endcaps Using AEC Modify Tools on page 906. Space Enhancements In this version of AutoCAD Architecture workflows around generating and evaluating spaces have been improved so space calculation is even more intuitive than before. Space Enhancements | 11 Improved Workflow for Associative Spaces In AutoCAD Architecture 2009, the selection of objects that can serve as boundaries for associative spaces has been simplified and enhanced. ■ The Bound Spaces property can be set on all boundary objects in the Properties palette, including linework like lines and polylines. This allows you to divide spaces that don’t have objects such as walls bounding them, even across xrefs. Make a linework object a space-bounding object Use a linework object to generate spaces ■ Objects on frozen and hidden layers participate in the generation of spaces. ■ A visual filter allows you to quickly display all boundary objects in the drawing area, making space generation more transparent. For more information, see Displaying all Boundary Objects in the Drawing Area on page 1937. ■ The following boundary objects have been enhanced: Ellipse, Spline, 3D polylines. ■ Blocks and MV-blocks now have their own Bound Spaces property. For more information, see Generating Associative Spaces on page 1931. Surface Openings on Curved Surfaces In previous versions, openings on curved surfaces were segmented according to the selected facet resolution. Now, you can create unsegmented openings on curved space surfaces. For more information, see Adding Openings to 3D Freeform Space Surfaces on page 2023. 12 | Chapter 1 New Features and Introduction Previous version (left) and current version (right) Automatic Update of Associative Spaces through External References Associative spaces that are bounded by objects in external references are now included in the automatic update of associative spaces. No manual updates are necessary anymore. For more information about working with xrefs and blocks, see Generating Associative Spaces from Xrefs and Blocks on page 1941. Improved SIS Space Calculation Standard The room height calculation under the SIS space calculation standard has been improved, and now takes into consideration that a space must have a room height of at least 1.90 meter with a width of at least 0.6 meter to be counted as measurable area. The SIS calculation standard delivered with this software is automatically checking the height of each space to make sure the space height conditions are met. gbXML Support When creating spaces and zones in AutoCAD Architecture, you can assign engineering data necessary for calculating loads and airflows. This data can be exported to the engineering and building information in Green Building XML (gbXML) format. You can use gbXML files in external analysis tools. After you analyze the calculated loads and airflows for the spaces and zones, you can design your duct systems accordingly. For more information, see Using Spaces for Load Analysis on page 2105. Match Properties for AEC Objects The AutoCAD Match Properties functionality has been extended to AEC objects, allowing you to quickly copy both style and object properties from a source AEC object to one or more other destination AEC objects of the same type. Any style or object overrides in effect for the source object will be applied to the destination object; any style/object overrides in effect for the destination object will be removed. Matching properties from left door to right door For more information, see Matching Object Properties on page 111. Match Properties for AEC Objects | 13 Improved Annotation Scaling AutoCAD Architecture 2009 streamlines steps around construction documentation by allowing you to link display configurations to the annotation scale. Once you select the Scale you can now also select a Display Configuration to match. This give you more control of the graphics that are displayed when you change scales, such as from the drawing status bar. For more information, see Annotation Scaling on page 2441. New Annotation Tools A number of annotation tools formerly available only as content blocks in DesignCenter are now available through tools on the tool palettes and in Content Browser, allowing you more options and greater flexibility when annotating drawings. The following tools can be accessed from the Annotation tool palette and Content Browser: North arrow and datum point symbols 14 | Chapter 1 New Features and Introduction Fire rating line tools Match line tools Revision cloud tools Bar scale tool Column grid bubble tool For more information about working with these tools, see Annotation and Keynoting Tools on page 2381. New Annotation Tools | 15 Multiline Tags You now have the ability to create multiline annotations quickly and efficiently. The multiline tag support also includes the ability to specify text orientation, alignment, and wrapping through intuitive grips. Using new multiline abilities you can simple stretch the grip and watch the annotation change. For more information, see The Basic Annotation Tool on page 2381 Multiline Leaders New multiline leaders make annotation faster and easier. You can efficiently annotate multiple objects with a single text reference. 16 | Chapter 1 New Features and Introduction Adding a leader line The updated annotative tools are accessible via the Content Browser and include: Leader, Sheet Keynote, Reference Keynote, Reference Keynote (Straight Leader), Square (Straight Leader), Text (Straight Leader). For more information, see Adding and Removing Leader Lines from Leaders on page 2392. Material Tool Material tools now let you apply a material directly to an AEC object component you select in the drawing. When the tool is active, object components highlight as you move the cursor over them, displaying a tooltip that identifies the component/object and the material to be applied. You specify whether to apply the material to the style or only to the object. The tools also support applying render materials to AutoCAD entities. For more information, see Using the Material Tool to Add Materials to Objects on page 605. Performance Improvements The performance on these objects and workflows has been improved in order generate a faster and more efficient work environment for your building models: Material Tool | 17 Associative Spaces Performance The performance for generating and updating associative spaces has been improved. Boundary objects are detected more quickly, and objects that do not form a boundary are filtered out more effectively. The interaction with boundary objects in external references is improved, so that an update especially across a large model will show significant acceleration. Changing the properties of space surfaces and openings has been improved too, so that now when you change surface information of individual space surfaces, like changing the surface type or renaming a surface, you will experience a much better performance than before. NOTE When you are converting drawings with xrefs and associative spaces from a previous version, the first time the main drawing is opened will be accompanied by a noticeable performance hit. This is however only a one-time effect; once the main drawing and its associated xref drawings have been and opened and saved with the current version, the performance will be improved for all future sessions. Drawing Compare Performance The Drawing Compare feature has significantly improved in performance in the areas of file matching, drawing analysis, and object comparison. Also a change to the visual filters or the included objects in the comparison does no longer cause a full reload and re-comparison of the model. For more information, see Drawing Compare on page 471. Graphic System Performance The performance of the graphic system during panning, zooming, and orbiting AEC objects in wireframe or shaded views has been significantly improved. This is especially visible for objects that have materials assigned to them. Xref Performance The performance of the OBJRELUPDATE command when used across xrefs has been improved. This is especially visible in drawings with many xrefs, and it will help you to improve your workflows on large projects and complex models. Data Exchange The following areas of data exchange have been added or improved for AutoCAD Architecture 2009: ■ Windows Vista support for DWF files: AutoCAD Architecture 2009 provides native DWF support for users of Windows Vista. DWF files published to the XPS specification can be automatically opened and viewed using the XPS viewer built into Windows Vista, without the need for plug-ins or other downloads. For XP users, this same DWF support can be achieved via a download. ■ IFC support: This release of AutoCAD Architecture natively imports and exports the most current Industry Foundation Classes (IFC).Improved import and export functionality gives you the ability to specify which objects are included during exchange. Additionally, style names can be preserved during import and IFC files can be converted to projects, complete with Project, Site, Building and Building Storey Information. For more information, see Importing and Exporting IFC Files on page 177. ■ Enhanced Metadata for DWF or DWFx: Products such as Autodesk Quantity Takeoff (QTO) and Autodesk FMDesktop use property set data to extract rich information from AutoCAD Architecture models via DWF. Consuming DWF or DWFx data in these applications from an AutoCAD Architecture model has been improved. With a new option for “Automatic Property Set Data”, users do not have to create and 18 | Chapter 1 New Features and Introduction apply property set definitions to objects; all automatic properties, like the wall length or space area, are exported automatically when generating the DWF or DWFx file. For more information, see Publishing Drawings to DWF and DWFx on page 204. ■ gbXML support: When creating spaces and zones in AutoCAD Architecture, you can assign engineering data necessary for calculating loads and airflows. This data can be exported to the engineering and building information in Green Building XML (gbXML) format. You can use gbXML files in external analysis tools. After you analyze the calculated loads and airflows for the spaces and zones, you can design your duct systems accordingly. For more information, see Using Spaces for Load Analysis on page 2105. 64-bit Support AutoCAD Architecture 2009 now supports 64-bit computer architecture. You can install AutoCAD Architecture 2009 on a 64-bit computer and have access to all product and data import and export functionality, like importing database fields, exporting property set data, or exporting IFC. The new 64-bit architecture lets you take advantage of the memory improvements provided by more powerful computers. AutoCAD Highlights AutoCAD Architecture 2009 is built on the design platform of AutoCAD 2009. In addition to the new features described, you can benefit from the exciting new feature set of AutoCAD 2009 too. For a full listing of the new AutoCAD features, see the AutoCAD Help. The following sections describe the new AutoCAD features that will be most likely to be useful for the architect, engineer, or construction professional. DGN Support AutoCAD 2009 has extended its support of the MicroStation TM DGN format by Bentley®. Now when you import a DGN file, you have better control of how properties, such as layers, linetypes, lineweights, and colors are mapped from DGN to DWG. Additionally, export has been expanded beyond V8 DGN to also include V7 DGN, giving you more control of how you collaborate with other design professionals who may be referencing files of this format. Lighting Tools AutoCAD 2009 gives you more control over lighting, letting you create more realistic scenes, complete with shadows. The improvement of this feature, combined with the ability to leverage design material for visualization purposes, will allow you to create more realistic renderings with highly integrated visualization tools. 64-bit Support | 19 Geo-Enabled DWG Files The new GEOGRAPHICLOCATION command (GEO alias) enables you to enter the location values for a geographic location or import them from various sources including XML or XMZ files as well as from Google Earth™ mapping service. With this ability, imported data can be used to create sunlight based on the site location for design and visualization purposes. View and Navigation Tools There are a number of different ways to view the model in AutoCAD Architecture. For a complete description, see “Control the Drawing Views” in the AutoCAD help. The following sections highlight view and navigation tools new for this release of AutoCAD Architecture. 20 | Chapter 1 New Features and Introduction Quick View Layouts Quick View layouts let you preview model space and all layouts in a drawing as a horizontal row of images from the application status bar. The model space and all the layouts within the drawing are displayed in a horizontal row above the status bar. The thumbnail is highlighted when the cursor is on it. Click on the thumbnail to navigate to the model space or layout. You can also easily plot or publish with the plot and publish icons that appear at the top corners of the layout thumbnail when a cursor is on it. For more information, see “Switch Between Layouts in the Current Drawing” in the AutoCAD Help. Quick View Drawings The Quick View Drawings functionality lets you preview and switch between currently open drawings from the application status bar. A two-level row structure is displayed for Quick View drawings. The first level displays the thumbnail images of open drawings and the second level displays the thumbnail images for model space and all layouts in a drawing. You can save and close a drawing with the icons located at the top corners of the thumbnail images when a cursor is placed upon it. You can also create and open a new drawing with the Quick View toolbar that appears when Quick View is displayed. For more information, see “Switch Between Open Drawings” in the AutoCAD Help. ViewCube The ViewCube is a 3D navigation tool that appears when the 3D graphics system is enabled and allows you to switch between standard and isometric views. AutoCAD Highlights | 21 Once the ViewCube is displayed, it appears in one of the corners of the drawing window over the model in an inactive state. When you position the cursor over the ViewCube, it becomes active. You can switch to one of the available preset views, roll the current view, or change to the Home view of the model. The ViewCube can be displayed in the drawing area and in the Object Viewers provided with the program. For detailed information about the ViewCube, see “View Cube” in the AutoCAD Help. For information about Object Viewers, see Object Viewer on page 757. SteeringWheels SteeringWheels are tracking menus that are divided into different sections known as wedges. Each wedge on a wheel represents a single navigation tool. You can pan, zoom, or manipulate the current view of a model in different ways. SteeringWheels can save you time and clicks by combining many of the common navigation tools into a single interface. A wheel is specific to the context that a model is being viewed in. For detailed information, see “SteeringWheels” in the AutoCAD Help. ShowMotion The ShowMotion feature lets you add movement and transitions to captured camera positions called shots. You can create Still shots, Cinematic shots or a recorded walk that allows you to click and drag along the path of desired animation. Shots can be grouped together to form sequences called view categories. For detailed information, see “ShowMotion” in the AutoCAD help. A Quick Start for Transitioning from AutoCAD to AutoCAD Architecture If you have previously accomplished your architectural tasks with AutoCAD and want to transition to using AutoCAD Architecture, you will find that using tools specifically designed for architects provides additional productivity and benefits over the AutoCAD drafting methods you used before. 22 | Chapter 1 New Features and Introduction The help system is designed to simplify the transition from AutoCAD to AutoCAD Architecture. These help components will assist new users with previous AutoCAD experience to easily segue into working with AutoCAD Architecture: ■ Getting Started movies ■ Learning resources overview for different expertise levels ■ User interface overview ■ New Features Workshop ■ Webcasts for typical architectural tasks ■ Getting Started guides Welcome Screen This quick overview of tasks and how to accomplish them in AutoCAD Architecture can help you get an easy start. For additional information, watch short movies which you can find on the Welcome to AutoCAD Architecture 2009 page, the Learning Resources page, or the main Help page. ■ Click Help menu ➤ Welcome Screen, and then select a movie under Getting Started Movies on the right pane. ■ Click Help menu ➤ Learning Resources, and then click Panel 2 - Getting Started Movies. A Quick Start for Transitioning from AutoCAD to AutoCAD Architecture | 23 NOTE The software locations for tools, palettes, and catalogs listed below are the default locations for a standard US install. Customized installations, as well as localized versions may vary in the tools they supply and the structure of the tool palettes. How do I… with AutoCAD tools with AutoCAD Architecture tools Palette or UI Location More Information Solids Mass Elements and Mass Groups Design Group Massing Palette ■ Online Help: Mass Elements and Mass Groups on page 683 Create Presentation Graphics? Visual Styles Visual Styles Visualization Group - Visual Styles Palette ■ Online Help: “Use a Visual Style to Display Your Model” in the AutoCAD Help Create Space Plans? Polyline and Hatch Spaces Design Group Spaces Palette ■ Online Help: Space Types on page 1914 ■ Getting Started Movie: Creating Spaces to Calculate Areas Work with Conceptual Massing? Design Massing Studies? Create a Space Layout and Colored Plans? 24 | Chapter 1 New Features and Introduction How do I… with AutoCAD tools with AutoCAD Architecture tools Palette or UI Location More Information Create Color Fill Plans? Hatching and Polylines Display Themes and Spaces Document Group - Themes Palette ■ Online Help: Process Overview: Creating Display Themes on page 2584 ■ Getting Started Movie: Creating Color-Filled Presentation Plans Draw Walls? Linework or Multilines Walls Design Group Walls Palette ■ Online Help: Walls on page 771 ■ Getting Started Movie: Laying Out Floor Plans Draw Doors? Blocks or Dynamic Blocks Doors Design Group Doors Palette ■ Online Help: Doors on page 1227 Draw Windows? Blocks or Dynamic Blocks Windows Design Group Windows Palette ■ Online Help: Windows on page 1297 Draw Stairs? Linework Stairs Design Group Design Palette ■ Online Help: Stairs on page 1391 Create Floor Plans? NOTE More Stair tools can be accessed from Content Browser. A Quick Start for Transitioning from AutoCAD to AutoCAD Architecture | 25 How do I… with AutoCAD tools with AutoCAD Architecture tools Palette or UI Location More Information Draw Railings? Linework Railings Design Group Design Palette ■ Online Help: Railings on page 1529 ■ Online Help: Curtain Walls on page 927 ■ Online Help: Multi-View Blocks on page 1895 NOTE More Railing tools can be accessed from Content Browser. Draw Curtain Walls? Linework Curtain Walls Design Group Design Palette MultiView Blocks Design Group - FF & E Palette NOTE More Curtain Wall tools can be accessed from Content Browser. Add Furniture and Fixtures? Place Furniture, Fixtures, and Equipment? Blocks or Dynamic Blocks Create Annotation and Scheduling? 26 | Chapter 1 New Features and Introduction How do I… with AutoCAD tools with AutoCAD Architecture tools Palette or UI Location More Information Dimension Drawings? Dimensions AEC Dimensions Document Group - Dimension Palette ■ Online Help: AEC Dimensions on page 2243 Add Schedule Tags? Blocks Tag Tools Document Group - Tags Palette ■ Online Help: Adding Tags Using Schedule Tag Tools on page 2495 Extract Schedules from Designs? Tables Schedules Document Group - Schedules Palette ■ Online Help: Managing Schedule Tables on page 2505 ■ Learning Movie: Creating Schedules Modify Block Properties for Scheduling Data? Attributes Property Set Definitions Style Manager ■ Online Help: Property Set Definitions on page 2542 Create Enlarged Plans? Xclip Callouts and Project Navigator Document Group - Callouts Palette ■ Online Help: Working with Callouts on page 2449 A Quick Start for Transitioning from AutoCAD to AutoCAD Architecture | 27 How do I… with AutoCAD tools with AutoCAD Architecture tools Palette or UI Location More Information Extract Building Sections? Linework Sections Document Group - Callouts Palette ■ Online Help: Placing Section Callouts on page 2466 ■ Getting Started Movie: Creating Sections Extract Elevations? Linework Elevations Document Group - Callouts Palette ■ Online Help: Placing Elevation Callouts on page 2471 Mark up drawing revisions? REVCLOUD command Revision Clouds Document Group - Annotation Palette ■ Online Help: AEC Content in the Content Browser on page 2600 Linework Detail Components ■ Online Help: Detail Components on page 2339 ■ Getting Started Movie: Detailing Your Designs NOTE More Revision Cloud tools can be accessed from Content Browser. Add Details and Keynotes? Create Details? Detailing Group 28 | Chapter 1 New Features and Introduction How do I… with AutoCAD tools with AutoCAD Architecture tools Palette or UI Location More Information Annotate Details? Leaders Keynoting Document Group - Annotation Palette ■ Online Help: Keynoting Tools on page 2397 Find and Manage Content? Windows® Explorer and DesignCenter Content Browser Content Browser ■ Online Help: Understanding the Content Browser on page 121 Manage Layers? Layer Properties Manager Layer Manager, Layer Key Styles, Layer Standards Layer Manager ■ Online Help: Managing Drawing Layers on page 488 ■ Online Help: Working with Layer Keys on page 514 ■ Online Help: Creating and Editing Layer Standards on page 526 Sheet Set Manager Project Navigator Project Navigator ■ Online Help: A Short Overview of Drawing Management ■ Getting Started Movie: Managing Your Drawings Work in a Project? Manage Project Drawings? A Quick Start for Transitioning from AutoCAD to AutoCAD Architecture | 29 Starting AutoCAD Architecture Use one of the following methods to start AutoCAD Architecture: ■ Double-click the AutoCAD Architecture icon on your desktop. The icon is displayed on your desktop if you chose to create it when you installed the software. ■ On the Start menu, click Programs ➤ Autodesk ➤ AutoCAD Architecture 2009 ➤ AutoCAD Architecture 2009. NOTE AutoCAD Architecture 2009 can be run under Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Vista. Customizing Startup You can use command-line switches in the properties of the desktop icon to specify AutoCAD Architecture startup options: ■ Run a startup script when you start the software. ■ Start the software with a specific template. ■ Start the software with a specific profile (ARG file). ■ Create several desktop icons, each with different startup options. For more information, see “Customize Startup” in AutoCAD Help. Default Content Paths for Microsoft Windows Vista AutoCAD Architecture 2009 is running under Microsoft Windows Vista. The default content paths for style drawings, support files, and tool catalogs vary between Windows XP and Windows Vista: Operating System AutoCAD Architecture 2009 Content Path Windows XP C:\Documents and Settings\\My Documents Windows Vista C:\Users\ \Documents Finding Help With AutoCAD Architecture 2009, you can move smoothly from 2D drafting to building information modeling in an AutoCAD-based environment. AutoCAD Architecture supports your current practices and helps you to take advantage of your knowledge of AutoCAD. Intelligent architectural objects and other powerful design and documentation features offered by AutoCAD Architecture will help you reap productivity benefits by minimizing tedious drafting and rework. Autodesk provides many resources to ensure that you quickly become productive with AutoCAD Architecture and the many new features available in this release. Online and print documentation, real-world tutorials, and technical support channels are all available to answer your questions as you begin working with the software. 30 | Chapter 1 New Features and Introduction There are various available resources to help you learn about AutoCAD Architecture 2009 and AutoCAD® 2009. Documentation Description AutoCAD Architecture 2009 Installation Guide Explains how to install and configure AutoCAD Architecture 2009. AutoCAD Architecture 2009 Help Explains AutoCAD Architecture concepts and provides step-bystep procedures. AutoCAD Architecture 2009 Printed Getting Started Guide The printed Getting Started tutorial gives you a quick, but comprehensive introduction to the concepts of working with AutoCAD Architecture 2009. AutoCAD Architecture 2009 Online Tutorials A set of exercises designed to give you an overview of the capabilities and features of AutoCAD Architecture. AutoCAD Architecture 2009 New Features Workshop Gives an overview of the new features in AutoCAD Architecture 2009. AutoCAD Architecture 2009 Getting Started Movies View these movies to learn about typical and frequently used tasks. AutoCAD 2009 User’s Guide Provides conceptual and overview material with step-by-step procedures for AutoCAD 2009. AutoCAD 2009 New Features Workshop Gives an overview over the new features in AutoCAD 2009. The advantage of online manuals is that they present information quickly while you are in a drawing session. Although online Help topics provide some conceptual and overview material, their main purpose is to help you get a task done efficiently. Therefore, the AutoCAD Architecture online Help emphasizes step-by-step procedures relevant to command selection. It also incorporates visual examples and links to more information. Online tutorials are also an excellent way to become familiar with AutoCAD Architecture. When you use the tutorials to learn program concepts, you can keep the tutorial window open in the drawing area while you perform the steps. To access AutoCAD Architecture 2009 Help 1 Click Help menu ➤ Help. 2 When the Help window is displayed, click the AutoCAD Architecture 2009 Help book on the Contents tab, and then browse the contents to locate the information you need. Or use the Index or Search tabs to find specific topics. Icons with a red marker indicate topics that include information about new features. Finding Help | 31 Red marker indicates topic covering new feature To access AutoCAD Architecture 2009 New Features Workshop 1 On the Help menu, click New Features Workshop. 2 On the Main Menu page, click the category for the feature you want to learn about. To access AutoCAD Architecture 2009 Tutorials 1 On the Help menu, click Tutorials. 2 When the Help window is displayed, browse the Contents tab to locate the exercise you want to perform. The tutorials include datasets that correspond to the exercises. To access AutoCAD 2009 Help 1 Click Help menu ➤ Help. 2 When the Help window is displayed, click the AutoCAD Help book on the Contents tab, and then browse the contents to locate the information you need. Or use the Index or Search tabs to find specific topics. To access AutoCAD 2009 New Features Workshop 1 Click Help menu ➤ Help. 2 When the Help window is displayed, click the AutoCAD Help book, and then click the New Features Workshop link under General Information. Autodesk Training Programs and Products Training programs and products from Autodesk help you learn the key technical features of your Autodesk software and improve your productivity. For the latest information about Autodesk training, visit http://www.autodesk.com/training or contact your local Autodesk office. Autodesk Authorized Training Centers Be more productive with Autodesk software. Get trained at an Autodesk Authorized Training Center (ATC) with hands-on, instructor-led classes to help you get the most from your Autodesk products. Enhance your productivity with proven training from over 1,400 ATC sites in more than 75 countries. For more information 32 | Chapter 1 New Features and Introduction about Autodesk Authorized Training Centers, contact atc.program@autodesk.com or visit the online ATC locator at http://www.autodesk.com/atc. Autodesk Official Training Courseware Autodesk publishes many courseware titles each year for users at all levels to improve their productivity with Autodesk software. The preferred training materials of Autodesk partners, these books are also well-suited for self-paced, standalone learning. All courseware simulates real-world projects with hands-on, job-related exercises. Autodesk Official Training Courseware (AOTC) is developed by Autodesk. Autodesk Authorized Training Courseware (AATC) is developed by Autodesk partners, including titles in a growing number of languages. Autodesk Official Certification Courseware (AOCC) teaches the knowledge and skills assessed on the Certification examinations. Visit http://www.autodesk.com/aotc to browse the Autodesk Courseware catalog. Autodesk Certification e-Learning Autodesk e-Learning for Autodesk Subscription customers features interactive lessons organized into product catalogs. Each lesson is 20-40 minutes in length and features hands-on exercises, with an option to use a simulation or the software application. You can also use an online evaluation tool that identifies gaps in skills, determines what lessons will be most helpful, and gauges learning progress. If you are a member of Autodesk subscription, you can access e-Learning and other subscription services from within your Autodesk product. For more information about Autodesk subscription resources, visit http://www.autodesk.com/subscription. Contacting Autodesk Autodesk, Inc. 111 McInnis Parkway San Rafael, CA 94903 USA Phone: 415-507-5000 Website: http://www.autodesk.com Sales Information To purchase additional Autodesk software, contact your local reseller. For the name of the authorized reseller nearest you, call 1-800-964-6432 or access the Resellers and Training Centers website, http://www.autodesk.com/resellers/. Technical Support If you have technical questions about the products, you should contact your local reseller or check the frequently asked questions (Technical Solutions & FAQS) section and Discussion Groups on the website for Autodesk Official Training Courseware | 33 AutoCAD Architecture at http://www.autodesk.com/support. News groups are another good source of information. You can look through the questions that have already been posted, or you can post your own questions. Feedback Please let us know what you think! Whether you have a suggestion for product enhancement, a compliment, or a complaint, or if you think you have found a bug, we would like to know about it. To make comments and find additional information, visit our website at http://www.autodesk.com/contact. 34 | Chapter 1 New Features and Introduction 2 The Workspace The AutoCAD Architecture workspace is a highly customizable graphical user interface designed to accommodate the various workflows and work styles of architectural professionals. The topics in this section provide an overview of the available workspace components and describe how to access and configure them to meet your needs. For detailed instructions on using workspace components to create and edit architectural objects, refer to the relevant object-specific topics in Help (Walls, Doors, Windows, and so on). The Workspace Concept In AutoCAD Architecture, a workspace is a task-based customization of the basic user interface that includes only those menus, toolbars, and palettes you need for a particular architectural process. When you first start AutoCAD Architecture, you are prompted to set the initial drawing environment and the default drawing template file by selecting one of the following workspaces: Workspace Description Design Provides all the basic tools for creating architectural objects in your drawings. Document Provides tools for adding schedule tables, annotations, callouts, and other documentation objects to your drawings. Detailing Provides tools for inserting a wide variety of predefined detail components, as well as tools for detail drafting. Visualization Includes all the tools available in the Design workspace as well as the Ribbon, which provides tools for 3D modeling, viewing, and rendering. Whichever workspace you select, you can reconfigure it according to your preferences as you work. You can move or hide various components as needed, display additional toolbars, or add new tools and tool palettes. If desired, you can save your customizations as a new workspace that you can access for later drawing sessions. You can also switch from one workspace to another at any time by selecting a new one from the drop-down list on the Workspaces toolbar or from the Workspace Switching flyout menu on the application status bar. For more information, see Changing Workspaces on page 36 and “Create Task-Based Workspaces” in the AutoCAD help. 35 Default configuration of the Design workspace Changing Workspaces Use this procedure to change from one workspace to another. 1 Display the Workspaces toolbar in the drawing window. Alternatively, you can click (Workspace) on the application status bar. 2 Select the desired workspace option: if you want to… Then… use an existing workspace select it from the drop-down menu. edit an existing workspace or create a new workspace select Customize. For more information, see “Customize Workspaces” in the AutoCAD Customization Guide. Workspace Components The AutoCAD Architecture workspace consists of a drawing window with menus, toolbars, tool palettes, and other controls that you use to set up an architectural project, create your design, and generate construction documents.The default configuration of these components varies depending on which of the predefined workspaces you select (Design, Document, Detailing, or Visualization). 36 | Chapter 2 The Workspace In the following sections, each component of the workspace is described in detail. Not every component is necessarily visible in each workspace confirguration. Most components can be turned on and off according to user requirements. For an interactive guide through the User Interface, select Help menu ➤ Welcome Screen ➤ User Interface Overview. The Menu Browser The menu browser lets you organize and display pull-down menu commands. The menu browser can be displayed instead of the standard menu bar, or in addition to it. NOTE The menu browser cannot be turned off. Menu browser, Quick Access toolbar, and the application status bar are one integrated user interface component. The menu browser lets you perform the following operations: ■ List recently opened documents, including APJ files The Menu Browser | 37 ■ Search for a command by name ■ Add search tags to a command ■ Display extended tooltips for each command Accessing Commands from the Menu Browser To access the menu browser click at the upper-left corner of the workspace. Move the cursor over a menu or category on the left side of the browser, and then click the desired option on the right. The menu browser remains open as long as the cursor is located inside the menu browser window. To close the menu browser, either activate a menu command, or click outside of the menu browser window. Searching for Commands in the Menu Browser As opposed to the traditional menu bar, where each command can be accessed only from a set location, in the menu browser you can search for a command and then select it from the list of matches. NOTE In addition to instances of the search string, the results include the contents of the associated tooltip and any Search tags you have defined in the Customize User Interface editor (CUI). For information about search tags, see “Assign Search Tags” in the AutoCAD help. 1 Click to open the menu browser. 2 In the Search field, enter the desired search term. A list of found matches is displayed in the menu browser. To select one of the found commands, click it. 3 Click the desired command in the list of matches. 38 | Chapter 2 The Workspace 4 To return to the regular menu display in the menu browser, click Search field. at the right side of the Displaying Recently Opened Documents in the Menu Browser Menu browser offers the following options for displaying recently opened documents in AutoCAD Architecture 2009: ■ Group documents by file type (including DWG, DWT, APJ) or by last-saved date ■ Show either icons that indicate the document type or actual preview images of drawings at the size you specify ■ Flag documents you want displayed regardless of the last-saved date. 1 Click to open the menu browser. 2 Click Recent Documents. 3 At the top left of the list of documents, specify how you want them grouped. The default setting (Ordered List) displays documents alphabetically. Alternatively, you can group them by last-saved date or file type. 4 At the top right of the list of documents, click (Preview) to specify whether to display file type icons, or small, medium, or large preview images next to the document names. 5 If you want to keep a document in the list, regardless of its last-saved date, click its pushpin so that the image changes from it. to . The document will remain in the list until you unpin Displaying Recently Performed Commands in the Menu Browser For quick access to frequently used commands in the menu browser, use the following instruction: 1 Click to open the menu browser. 2 Click Recent Actions to display a list of commands recently selected in the menu browser. (Commands run from the command line, context menus, or other mechanisms are not included.) 3 If you want to keep a command in the list, regardless of its last-performed date, click its pushpin so that the image changes from unpin it. to . The command will remain in the list until you The Menu Browser | 39 Changing the Number of Recent Files and Actions in the Menu Browser Use this procedure to change the default number (9) of recent documents or recent actions displayed in the menu browser: 1 Click to open the menu browser. 2 At the bottom of the menu browser click Options. Alternatively you can click Format menu ➤ Options. 3 On the Open and Save tab of the Options dialog, under Menu Browser, change the values for Number of recently-used files and Number of recently-used actions. 4 Click OK. The Menu Bar The menu bar is located at the top of the application window and offers hierarchical access to commands. The menu bar of the drawing window provides the following pulldown menus, each of which includes a group of commands that support a particular aspect of the architectural workflow. Where applicable, menu options show alternate access methods, such as a toolbar button or a keyboard shortcut. Menu Contents File ■ Drawing transmittal and publishing commands ■ Access to the Project Browser ■ Drawing utilities such as Audit, Recover, and Purge. Edit Standard Microsoft Windows editing commands, such as Copy and Paste View ■ Commands that change the working view ■ Access to Keynote Display and Cameras 40 | Chapter 2 The Workspace Menu Contents Insert ■ General insertion commands for external files and file types ■ Access to DesignCenter and Detail Component Manager ■ Formatting commands for color, linetype, lineweight, and other graphic characteristics. ■ Access to tools for managing styles, layers, display system, structural members, schedule tags, blocks, and profiles. ■ Access to the Options dialog, where you can modify default settings for a wide range of system behaviors and characteristics ■ Access to architectural objects for the design phase of the project ■ Access to architectural objects for the conceptual modelling phase of the project ■ Access to basic AutoCAD linework objects, like lines, polylines, and rectangles ■ Access to AutoCAD text and table tools Modify ■ Access to basic object manipulation tools, like stretch, mirror, and rotate Window ■ Standard window configuration tools such as Tile and Cascade ■ Access to Project Navigator, Markup Set Manager, Tool Palettes, and Properties Palette ■ Commands for adding other pulldown menus to the menu bar (see table below for descriptions) Format Design Draw Help Access to the online Help, tutorials, and other resources to help you learn and use AutoCAD Architecture NOTE In AutoCAD Architecture Help and tutorials, instructions for selecting a particular pulldown or context menu option use this symbol ➤ to indicate any submenus in the path to that option. For example, the instruction for selecting the Sheet Keynotes option on the Keynote Display submenu of the View pulldown menu would be: Select View menu ➤ Keynote Display ➤ Sheet Keynotes. The Menu Bar | 41 In addition to the standard pulldown menus described above, you can load any of the following pulldown menus by selecting them from the Window menu: Menu Contents Document Similar to the Documentation menu in previous versions of the software. CAD Manager Access to advanced features like AEC Project Standards, Tool Catalog Generator, Keynote Editor, VBA Manager, Visual Basic Editor, Visual LISP Editor, the Script command, and Visual Audit. When this menu is loaded, toolbars are available to provide quicker access to some of these features. To display them, right-click in the toolbar area (not on a toolbar), and click ADT_CAD_MANAGER ➤ AEC Project Standards or ADT_CAD_MANAGER ➤ CAD Manager. 3D Solids Access to the Convert to Solids and Convert to 3D Solids commands plus suites of commands for creating and editing solids. When this menu is loaded, toolbars with the corresponding commands are also available. To display them, rightclick in the toolbar area (not on a toolbar), and click ADT_3DSOLIDS ➤ Solids or ADT_3DSOLIDS ➤ Solids Editing. Dimension Access to AutoCAD dimensioning tools Adding additional menus to the menu bar 1 Click Window menu ➤ Pulldowns. 2 Select the menus you want to add to the menu bar. Turning the Menu Bar On and Off You can turn the menu bar off completely if you want to work exclusively with the menu browser. To turn the menu bar off, right-click anywhere on the menu bar, and click Display Menu Bar. To turn the menu bar back on, click anywhere on the Quick Access toolbar (see The Quick Access Toolbar on page 42), and click Show Menu Bar. The Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar is a customizable toolbar s located at the top of the application window, just to the right of the menu browser button. By default, this toolbar contains a set of frequently used commands for the currently selected workspace. You can add or remove commands as follows: You can add and remove commands on the Quick Access toolbar. 42 | Chapter 2 The Workspace Adding a command to the Quick Access toolbar 1 Click Window menu ➤ Pulldowns ➤ Customize. 2 In the Customize User Interface dialog, select the Customize tab. 3 In the Customization in All CUI files panel, expand Workspaces, and select the workspace for which you want to add a command. 4 In the Workspace Contents panel, select Quick Access Toolbar. Expand Quick Access Toolbar in order to see which commands are currently contained in it. 5 In the Command List panel, select the command you want to add, and drag it over to the Workspace Contents panel onto the Quick Access Toolbar node. 6 Click OK. Removing a command from the Quick Access toolbar 1 Click Window menu ➤ Pulldowns ➤ Customize. 2 In the Customize User Interface dialog, select the Customize tab. 3 In the Customization in All CUI files panel, expand Workspaces, and select the workspace from which you want to delete a command. 4 In the Workspace Contents panel, expand Quick Access Toolbar. 5 Select the command to remove, right-click, and click Remove from Workspace. 6 Click OK. Toolbars Toolbars in AutoCAD Architecture workspaces contain buttons that you click to initiate commands, change settings, or access other features that you might often need during a drawing session. The icon on a toolbar button indicates its function. To display a tooltip with the button name, you move the cursor over the button. In some cases, the tooltip extends after hovering for a longer period of time. For detailed information, see Tooltips on page 53. By default, toolbars are displayed in the toolbar area just below the menu bar, but you can drag them into the drawing area or completely out of the drawing window if desired. You can also dock toolbars to an edge in the drawing area, hide them, resize them, or create your own. For detailed instructions on customizing the display of toolbars, see “Toolbars” in the AutoCAD Help. To display a toolbar that is currently not visible, right-click any visible toolbar, and click the name of the toolbar you want to see. Or you can right-click in the toolbar area (not on a toolbar), select a toolbar group, and then click a toolbar name. NOTE Most of the toolbars are for AutoCAD functionality; AEC functionality is by default accessed from the tool palettes, the Properties palette, and the menus. Toolbars | 43 Accessing the list of toolbars Context Menus Context menus in AutoCAD Architecture function the same way as the shortcut menus described in the AutoCAD Help. Right-clicking in most areas of the workspace displays a context menu that contains commands appropriate to the cursor position at that time. For example, when you right-click in the toolbar area, the context menu lists all the available toolbars. When you right-click in the drawing area, the content of the context menu depends on the currently selected object(s). For example, if one or more wall objects are selected, a wall-specific context menu is displayed as shown. Wall context menu If more than one type of object is selected, the context menu includes only those commands that can be applied to all the selected objects. If no objects are selected, the general context menu is displayed as shown 44 | Chapter 2 The Workspace below. This menu contains non-object-specific commands, including the same commands available from the Modify toolbar. General drawing context menu Tool Palettes Tool palettes provide the main method for accessing tools to create objects in your model. You can have tools for standard objects as well as for objects with specific styles and properties. Tool palettes are organized by tool palette groups in a tool palettes set. You can create your own tool palettes, or you can copy existing tool palettes from the Content Browser. Design tool palette with tools for standard design objects For more information, see Working with Tool Palettes on page 65. Tool Palettes | 45 Properties Palette The Properties palette provides a central location to view and modify both the physical and graphical properties of an object. The object can be one you are about to draw, or one that is already selected in the drawing area. Using the Extended Data tab of the Properties palette, you can also attach other kinds of information to an object, such as classifications, notes, reference documents, hyperlinks, and property set data. You typically keep the Properties palette open during an AutoCAD Architecture session. Wall Properties Palette For more information, see The Properties Palette on page 92. Ribbon The ribbon is a palette that displays task-based buttons and controls in a workspace. For example, when you switch to the Visualization workspace, the necessary tools for setting up and creating a rendering are displayed on the ribbon. For more information, see “The Ribbon” in the AutoCAD help. 46 | Chapter 2 The Workspace Drawing Window Status Bar Located at the bottom of the drawing area, the drawing window status bar displays status information about the current drawing and provides access to various commands that can be applied to the drawing as described below. ■ Open Drawing Menu: Click at the far left of the drawing window status bar to display a context menu of frequently used commands. These commands are also available from the standard pull-down menus. ■ Project Information: If the drawing is part of an AutoCAD Architecture project, this information includes the name of the project, and the type of file, (such as View or Construct). For more information, see Drawing Management on page 217. ■ Annotation Scale: To change the annotation scale for the current viewport, click the current value and select a new one from the list. Changing the scale may also change the Level of Detail setting described below. ■ Annotation Visibility: Click to show annotative objects for all scales. Click scales to annotative objects when the annotation scale changes. ■ Level of Detail: Shows the current display configuration of the active viewport and provides a drop-down list from which you can select another configuration. ■ Cut Plane: Identifies the global cut plane height for the active display configuration and provides access to a dialog that lets you adjust the setting. For more information, see Global Cut Planes on page 388. to automatically add Drawing Window Status Bar | 47 ■ (Surface Hatch Toggle): Lets you switch the display of surface hatching on or off. For more information, see Working with Surface Hatches on page 615. ■ (Layer Key Overrides): Lets you switch layer key overrides on or off in the Layer Key Overrides dialog. For more information, see Layer Key Overrides on page 524. ■ (Isolate Objects): Lets you hide or display objects you have selected in the drawing. For more information, see Isolating Objects on page 112. ■ (AEC Project Standards): When a project is loaded, click here to synchronize or configure standards for the current project. For more information, see Project Standards on page 409. ■ (Autodesk Trusted DWG): This icon indicates that you have opened a DWG, DWT, or DWS file that is created using Autodesk applications or RealDWG™-based applications. ■ (Manage Xrefs): Click to open the External References palette, where you can reload xrefs that are associated with your current drawing. ■ Missing Standards File(s): When applicable, this warning indicates that standards files are missing in the current drawing; you can then check settings for the standards and configure them as necessary. For more information, see Configuring Project Standards on page 416. ■ Drawing Status Bar Menu: A drop-down list of the settings and commands available for display on the drawing window status bar. Showing and Hiding Commands on the Drawing Window Status Bar You can turn individual features on the Drawing Window Status Bar menu off, if you do not need them. 1 Click the Drawing Window Status Bar menu arrow at the right end of the Drawing Window Status Bar. 2 Select or deselect individual items. 48 | Chapter 2 The Workspace Turning the Drawing Window Status Bar On and Off The drawing window status bar can be turned on and off entirely from the Application Status Bar (see also Application Status Bar on page 49.) Turning the drawing window status bar off will increase the size of the drawing area. 1 At the far right of the Application Status Bar, click the Application Status Bar menu. 2 Select or deselect Drawing Status Bar to show or hide this status bar. Command Window You can directly enter commands using the command window located immediately below the drawing window status bar. To hide the command window, or to display it if it is currently hidden, click Window menu ➤ Command Line. If you want to hide the command window except for its title bar when you are not using it, click the cursor over the title bar will redisplay the command window. . Moving Application Status Bar The application status bar contains settings valid for the whole drawing session in AutoCAD Architecture. Some settings, such as options for different elevations, only display if you are working within a project. For more information, see The Drawing Status Bar on page 269. The group of commands on the left side of the application status bar can be displayed as icons or text labels. Commands displayed as icons Commands displayed as text labels To change the display of these commands right-click any of them, and select or deselect Use Icons. To activate or deactivate any of the commands in this group, click the icon or label. Blue indicates an active control; gray indicates an inactive control. To change the settings for one of these commands, right-click the icon or label, and click Settings. For detailed information about these options, see “Use Precision Tools” in the AutoCAD help. The following list describes all the commands and settings on the application status bar: ■ ■ ■ Cursor coordinate values: Controls the coordinate format as either relative or absolute. For more information, see “Overview of Coordinate Entry” in the AutoCAD help. (Snap): Lets you restrict the movement of the cursor to the drawing grid. (Grid): Lets you display a rectangular grid as a drawing aid. Command Window | 49 ■ ■ (Ortho): Lets you restrict cursor movement to horizontal and vertical directions when creating and modifying objects. (Polar Tracking): Lets you restrict cursor movement to specified angles. ■ (Object Snap): Lets you restrict movement of the cursor to specified points on objects, such as the midpoint or an intersection point. ■ (Object Snap Tracking): Lets the cursor track along alignment paths based on other object snap points when specifying points in a command. This feature can be used only in conjunction with Object Snap. ■ (Dynamic UCS): Lets you temporarily and automatically align the XY plane of the UCS with a plane on a solid model while creating objects. ■ (Dynamic Input): Lets you enter values for objects directly onscreen near the cursor. Dynamic input can be turned on and off during creating or editing an object in the drawing area. ■ (Lineweight): In model space, lineweights are displayed in pixels and do not change when zoomed in or out. Displaying the lineweight could create some very heavy line display. ■ (Quick Properties): This feature is intended for AutoCAD objects and is turned off in AutoCAD Architecture. ■ (Model Space) or (Paper Space): Switches between layouts. ■ (Quick View Layouts): Lets you preview model space and all layouts in a drawing as a horizontal row of images. Click on a preview image to display the layout. For more information, see Quick View Tools on page 62 and “Navigate within a Drawing (Model Space and Layouts)” in the AutoCAD Help. ■ (Quick View Drawings): Lets you preview all currently open drawings with their model space and layouts. Click on the preview image to display the drawing or layout. For more information, see Quick View Tools on page 62 and “Navigate Between Open Drawings” in the AutoCAD Help. ■ (ShowMotion): Provides an onscreen display that can be used to create, select, and play back cinematic camera animations called Shots. These animations can be used for presentation purposes or for navigation. For more information, see “ShowMotion” in the AutoCAD Help. ■ (Pan). Lets you move the view in the drawing area ■ (Zoom): lets you increase or decrease the apparent size of objects in the drawing area ■ (SteeringWheel): Lets you display a tracking menu for different navigation tools. ■ (Workspaces): Lets you switch between workspaces. For more information, see The Workspace Concept on page 35. 50 | Chapter 2 The Workspace ■ (Lock Toolbar and Window positions). Lets you switch between docked windows and toolbars and floating windows and toolbars. ■ Elevation: Select a level for the calculation of the elevation offset. NOTE This option is available only if your current drawing is a construct drawing from an AEC project. ■ Elevation relative to construct’s level: Lets you define the elevation of the construct relative to the level you have selected. This button points the Elevation Offset worksheet where you enter or pick the elevation offset. ■ (Replace Z value with current elevation): Switching on or off, replacing the existing Z value with the current elevation. ■ (Clean Screen): Click to switch between the standard screen and a full screen. In full-screen mode, all toolbars and palettes (except the Tool Palettes) are hidden. Hidden palettes retain their current state. Showing and Hiding Commands on the Application Status Bar You can show or hide individual commands on the Application Status Bar menu. 1 Click the Application Status Bar menu arrow at the right end of the application status bar. 2 Select or deselect individual items. Project Navigator Palette The Project Navigator palette is the central location to create, modify, and access AutoCAD Architecture project files. You typically have the Project Navigator palette open in the workspace while you work on a project. For more information, see Drawing Management on page 217. Project Navigator Palette | 51 Project Navigator palette Finding Information in AutoCAD Architecture In addition to online help and tutorials, AutoCAD Architecture provides various ways to quickly access the information you need to be successful with new and existing features. Review the sections below to learn how you can get help quickly and with minimal disruption of your workflow. Info Center Toolbar InfoCenter is a central location where you can search for product-related help and other information sources. You can search for information through keywords (or by typing a phrase), display the Communication Center panel for product updates and announcements, or display the Favorites panel to access saved topics. When you enter keywords or type a phrase, and then press ENTER or click the Search button, you search multiple Help resources in addition to any files that have been specified in the InfoCenter Settings dialog. The results are displayed as links on a panel. You can click any of these links to display the Help topic, article, or document. In addition, InfoCenter displays Did You Know balloons for selected feature areas. Did You Know balloons provide Knowledge Base information and general instructional messages such as tips. You can click on the text or the Expand icon to expand the balloon to view the detailed information. For detailed information about InfoCenter, see “Search For and Receive Information” in the AutoCAD Help. 52 | Chapter 2 The Workspace Communication Center Communication Center is accessed from the InfoCenter toolbar. This resource displays links to information about product updates and product announcements, and may include links to Subscription Center, CAD Manager specified files, and RSS feeds. F1 Context Help For many commands and dialogs you can access a context-related Help topic using one of the following methods: ■ Press F1 while a command is active or a dialog is open. ■ Click the Help button in an open dialog. Tooltips In addition to interactive tooltips that help you to create and edit objects (see Direct Editing with Grips and Dynamic Dimensions on page 98), AutoCAD Architecture provides tooltips that display information about the command, option, or file over which you pause the cursor. Command Tooltips A short description displays whenever you pause the cursor over a command in any of the following locations: ■ In the menu browser ■ On toolbars ■ On the AutoCAD ribbon For some commands, an extended tooltip displays after a user-specified time interval. Standard tooltip for command F1 Context Help | 53 Extended tooltip for command Controlling the Display of Command Tooltips You can change the display of command tooltips. For extended tooltips you can define a time interval between the display of the basic tooltip and the extended tooltip. 1 Click Format menu ➤ Options. 2 Click the Display tab. 3 Under Window Elements, select or deselect Show Tooltips. 4 If you want to change the time interval between displaying the basic tooltip and the extended tooltip, select a different value for Number of seconds to delay. If you want to turn off the extended tooltip information completely, deselect Show extended Tooltips. 5 Click OK. Dialog and Palette Tooltips the following dialogs and palettes in AutoCAD Architecture support extended tooltips: ■ Project Browser dialog ■ Project Navigator palette ■ Drawing Compare palette 54 | Chapter 2 The Workspace Object Rollover Tooltips When you pause the cursor over an object in the drawing area, an informational tooltip displays basic information about the object. Unlike the rollover tooltips provided for ACAD objects, such as lines or polylines, this information is standardized and cannot be changed. For information on how to configure rollover tooltips for AutoCAD objects, see “Customize Rollover Tooltips” in the AutoCAD Customization Guide. Property Palette Tooltips The Properties palette and other property listings in AutoCAD Architecture display tooltips when you pause the cursor over a property in the list. Tooltips | 55 Thumbnail (Preview) Tooltips In Project Navigator, you can display thumbnail previews of project drawings. The preview can be a graphic or a detail, or a combination of both. Displaying thumbnails can be helpful when you are navigating large projects with many drawings. To activate preview tooltips in Project Navigator 1 In Project Navigator, open the Constructs, Views, or Sheets tab. 2 Right-click in the toolbar area at the bottom of the tab. 56 | Chapter 2 The Workspace 3 Click Tooltip style, and select one of these options: Tooltip Style Option Tooltip Display Name Displays only the name of the drawing file. Use this option if you want to maximize the file tree visibility. Preview Displays only a preview image of the file. You can specify the preview size (Small, Medium, or Large). Details Displays a text description of the file, identifying its location, size, last-saved date, and last editor. Preview & Details Displays a preview image and a text description. You can specify the preview size (Small, Medium, or Large). 4 If you want to display the information provided with the preview and detail tooltips, right-click, and click Preview/Details Pane. This option displays either a text description, or a preview of a selected graphic in an area below the file tree. Solution Tips The intended interaction among objects in an AutoCAD Architecture drawing depends on various rules about how objects are placed in relation to one another. Whenever the software identifies a problem with the placement of objects or their components, a solution tip icon is displayed to identify the location of the problem, as shown. Tooltips | 57 Move the cursor over the icon to display a message that describes the problem and provides one or more possible solutions. Some solution tips provide complete instructions for resolving the problem. Where more detailed instructions are required, you can press F1 to access the relevant topic in Help. Note that not all object configuration problems have an easily identifiable cause or a specific solution. This is often true in the case of boolean operations where an entity such as a body modifier is added to or subtracted from an object. In these cases, the solution tip identifies the kind of object or component involved and suggests corrective action. You may be advised to modify the location or the geometry of the object, but it is essentially a trial-and-error approach. The messages are tips rather than guaranteed solutions. By default, solution tip icons are displayed when you are drafting, but not during plotting or publishing. You can change these settings in the Options dialog using the following procedure: 1 Click Format menu ➤ Options 2 In the Options dialog, click the AEC Editor tab. 3 In the Solution Tip panel, select or clear Drafting and Plotting/Publishing as desired. Object Grip Tooltips Objects in AutoCAD Architecture have grips to manipulate them. Each grip has a tooltip that displays the function of the grip. Door dimension grips When you use a grip to edit an object, in many cases additional information appears in a tooltip, helping you to perform the grip action. 58 | Chapter 2 The Workspace Changing the standard size of a door with grips For more information, see Direct Editing with Grips and Dynamic Dimensions on page 98. Working with Objects in the Workspace The AutoCAD Architecture workspace is where you add and manipulate the architectural objects that make up your drawings. Adding Objects You add objects to the drawing with tools. Tools generally have preset creation parameters called properties. When you click an object tool to add an object in the drawing, the Properties palette opens so that you can change properties for the new object if desired. If not, you can go ahead and place the object in the drawing. For more information, see Tools on page 76. Adding a wall to the drawing Tools are arranged on tool palettes for easy access. To open the tool palettes, click Tool Palettes on the Window menu. Working with Objects in the Workspace | 59 Modifying Objects You can modify an object using any of the following methods: ■ Properties palette: The Properties palette is the central location for entering and changing information about an object. This palette has categories that correspond to the tabs in the Properties dialog boxes from earlier releases of the software. For detailed information, see The Properties Palette on page 92. Modifying a wall with the Properties palette ■ Matching properties between objects: You can use the Match Properties command to copy the style and display properties of one AEC object and apply them to one or more other objects of the same type. For more information, see Matching Object Properties on page 111. ■ Context menu: Right-click the object to display its available commands. 60 | Chapter 2 The Workspace Wall context menu ■ Direct editing with grips: Commands for modifying objects are accessible from the object’s grips. Click an object in two-dimensional (2D) or three-dimensional (3D) view to display its grips. For detailed information about object grips, see Direct Editing with Grips and Dynamic Dimensions on page 98. Information about grip-editing is also covered in the individual object sections. Window grips for direct editing Selecting Similar Objects Use this procedure to create a selection set of objects on the same layer and that have the same style. Selecting Similar Objects | 61 You may want to select a number of objects that are on the same layer and that have the same style in order perform a global change. The QSELECT command allows a single selection criterion, like layer or style. With the Select Similar command, you can select objects on the same layer that have the same style. NOTE Block references are selected based on their layer and block definition. 1 Select the first object in the selection set. 2 Right-click, and click Select Similar. NOTE Alternatively, you can click Edit ➤ Select Similar, and then select the first object. As a shortcut, you can select the first object, and then press CTRL+SHIFT+A. View and Navigation Tools There are a number of different ways to view the model in AutoCAD Architecture. For a complete description, see “Control the Drawing Views” in the AutoCAD help. The following sections highlight view and navigation tools new for this release of AutoCAD Architecture. Quick View Tools Quick View Tools make navigating and selecting drawings and layouts easier. Quick View Layouts Quick View layouts let you preview model space and all layouts in a drawing as a horizontal row of images. Click (Quick View Layouts) in the application status bar to display the Quick View layouts view: The model space and all the layouts within the drawing are displayed in a horizontal row above the status bar. The thumbnail is highlighted when the cursor is on it. Click on the thumbnail to navigate to the model space or layout. You can also easily plot or publish with the plot and publish icons that appear at the top corners of the layout thumbnail when a cursor is on it. For more information, see “Switch Between Layouts in the Current Drawing” in the AutoCAD Help. Quick View Drawings The Quick View Drawings functionality lets you preview and switch between currently open drawings from the application status bar. Click 62 | Chapter 2 The Workspace (Quick View Drawings) to display the preview of open drawings: A two-level row structure is displayed for Quick View drawings. The first level displays the thumbnail images of open drawings and the second level displays the thumbnail images for model space and all layouts in a drawing. The thumbnail image of the current drawing is highlighted by default. The second level of the thumbnail image enlarges and the first level reduces when a cursor is placed over the button. At any time, you can click on a thumbnail image to navigate to a drawing or layout. You can save and close a drawing with the icons located at the top corners of the thumbnail images when a cursor is placed upon it. You can also create and open a new drawing with the Quick View toolbar that appears when Quick View is displayed. For more information, see “Switch Between Open Drawings” in the AutoCAD Help. ViewCube The ViewCube is a 3D navigation tool that appears when the 3D graphics system is enabled and allows you to switch between standard and isometric views. Once the ViewCube is displayed, it appears in one of the corners of the drawing window over the model in an inactive state. When you position the cursor over the ViewCube, it becomes active. You can switch to one of the available preset views, roll the current view, or change to the Home view of the model. Displaying the ViewCube in the drawing area 1 Click View menu ➤ ViewCube ➤ On. The ViewCube can be displayed in the drawing area and in the Object Viewers provided with the program. ViewCube | 63 NOTE In the ViewCube in the drawing area, you have access to a compass and can define a UCS. When you access the View Cube in an Object Viewer, no UCS option is available. When you access the View Cube in an Object Viewer for an object style, no UCS option and no compass are available. The ViewCube is always turned on in Object Viewers. For detailed information about the ViewCube, see “View Cube” in the AutoCAD Help. For information about Object Viewer, see Object Viewer on page 757. SteeringWheels SteeringWheels are tracking menus that are divided into different sections known as wedges. Each wedge on a wheel represents a single navigation tool. You can pan, zoom, or manipulate the current view of a model in different ways. SteeringWheels can save you time and clicks by combining many of the common navigation tools into a single interface. Wheels are specific to the context that a model is being viewed in. Displaying the SteeringWheel in the drawing area 1 Click View menu ➤ SteeringWheels. Alternatively, you can right-click in the drawing area (with no objects selected), and click SteeringWheels. You can choose from several different wheels. Each has its own drafting theme. Some wheels are designed for 2D navigation while other wheels are better suited for 3D navigation. 64 | Chapter 2 The Workspace The SteeringWheels can be displayed in the drawing area and in the Object Viewers provided with the program. Displaying the Steering Wheel in an Object Viewer 1 Open the Object Viewer from the context menu of an object or from Style Manager. 2 Right-click in the view area, and click SteeringWheel. Alternatively, you can click . 3 To close the SteeringWheel, right-click, and click Close Wheel, or click again. For detailed information, see “SteeringWheels” in the AutoCAD Help. ShowMotion The ShowMotion feature lets you add movement and transitions to captured camera position called shots. You can create Still shots, Cinematic shots or a recorded walk that allows you to click and drag along the path of desired animation. Shots can be grouped together to form sequences called view categories. Starting ShowMotion 1 Click View menu ➤ ShowMotion. Alternatively, you can click on the Application Status Bar. For detailed information, see “ShowMotion” in the AutoCAD help. Working with Tool Palettes Tool palettes provide instant access to a complete inventory of AutoCAD Architecture tools—such as walls, doors, and windows—in one consistent user interface. Highly visual, tool palettes include previews of styles. You can create custom tool palettes that address your specific design needs. For example, you can create a palette to store a list of commonly used curtain wall, stair, and window tools. ShowMotion | 65 Tool palette components Tool Palettes Set Tool palettes sets contain groups of tool palettes. You can rename the default tool palettes set or create a custom tool palettes set. Additionally, you can add, remove, and rearrange palettes and groups in the set. You can add tool palettes to the tool palettes set from a tool catalog. For example, you could create one tool palette set for imperial tools and another for metric tools. For more information, see Specifying Different Tool Palettes for the Tool Palettes Set on page 69. Only one tool palettes set can be active during an AutoCAD Architecture session, although you can specify different tool palettes for different user profiles. When that profile is used, the collected tool palettes will be combined into one tool palettes set. Tool Palettes Group A tool palettes group is a collection of tool palettes. Three tool palettes groups are available when you start AutoCAD Architecture: Design, Document, and Detailing. You can add, rename, remove, export, import, and rearrange tool palettes groups. Tool palettes groups are contained in the tool palettes set. For more information, see “Organize Tool Palettes” and “Save and Share Tool Palettes” in the AutoCAD Help. TIP The quickest way to locate and view an AutoCAD topic referenced in AutoCAD Architecture Help is to click the Search tab in the Help window, select the Search titles only option, and then copy and paste or type in the AutoCAD topic name, and click List Topics. Tool Palettes Tool palettes contain collections of tools and represent the individual tabs of a tool palettes group. A number of tool palettes are available from the AutoCAD Architecture Sample Palette catalog. You can create new tool palettes in AutoCAD Architecture or in the Content Browser. Usually you place tools on tool palettes according to tool type or design phase. For example, you could place your wall tools on a tool palette called “Walls” or your preliminary conceptual tools on a tool palette called “Massing Study.” When you create a 66 | Chapter 2 The Workspace tool palette in the Content Browser, you can link it to AutoCAD Architecture. Whenever the tool palette is updated in the Content Browser, the changes are updated in the tool palette in AutoCAD Architecture too. This is useful for large projects where consistency of styles and tools is necessary. For more information, see Working with Tool Palettes from a Central Location on page 74. Tools Tools represent the individual objects you can add to a drawing. A tool contains creation parameters for the object it creates. When you add an object with a specific tool, the object has the settings you defined in the tool. This eases the design process and enhances consistency across a project. For example, you might define a wall tool that contains the style “CMU 8 Furring” and that has automatic cleanup and a baseline offset of 1". Whenever you add a wall with this tool, the wall has the style “CMU 8 Furring,” it cleans up automatically, and it has an offset of 1". For more information, see Tools on page 76. Tool Palettes and the Content Browser When multiple users are working on a large project, consistency of tools is especially important. Typically, the objects for the project and their styles and properties are set up by a CAD manager or system administrator, and then distributed to the team. The administrator can put tools and palettes in a central location in the Content Browser and link them to each user’s computer. Whenever the tools or palettes are updated in the Content Browser, they are updated on the users’ computers too. For more information, see Understanding the Content Browser on page 121 and Working with Tools from a Central Location on page 88. Project Tool Palettes When you are working with an AutoCAD Architecture project, you can design and associate a project tool palette group to the project. The project tool palettes contain the tools used in the project, and can be based on project standards. For detailed information about setting up project tool palettes, see Setting up Standard Tools in a Project on page 425. Opening the Tool Palettes Set Use this procedure to open the tool palettes set. ■ Click Window menu ➤ Tool Palettes. Alternatively, you can click on the Navigation toolbar, or press CTRL+3. Tool palettes set with tool palettes Opening the Tool Palettes Set | 67 Controlling the Appearance of the Tool Palettes Set Typically, the tool palettes set remains open during the AutoCAD Architecture session. It is the central location from which you add objects to the drawing and start object-related commands. A number of user-definable display options let you optimally integrate the tool palettes with your workspace. Docking the Tool Palettes Set Use this procedure to dock the tool palettes set on the left or right side of your workspace. 1 In the title bar of the tool palettes set, click , and then click Allow Docking. 2 Position the cursor over the title bar, and drag the tool palettes set to one side of your workspace. A preview graphic shows the new position of the tool palettes set. 3 Release the tool palettes set when it is in the location you want. Hiding the Tool Palettes Set Use this procedure to hide the tool palettes set when it is not in use. The tool palettes set becomes hidden when you move the cursor away from it, leaving only the title bar visible. When you move the cursor over the title bar, the tool palettes set is re-displayed. Tool palettes set hidden (left) and re-displayed (right) 1 In the title bar of the tool palettes set, click (Auto-hide). The tool palettes set is hidden, except for the title bar. 2 To re-display the tool palettes set, move the cursor over the title bar. Adjusting the Transparency of the Tool Palettes Set Use this procedure to adjust the transparency of the tool palettes set. The more transparent the tool palettes set, the more easily you can see objects in your drawing underneath it. NOTE Transparency is not available if hardware acceleration is enabled. 68 | Chapter 2 The Workspace 1 In the title bar of the tool palettes set, click , and then click Transparency. 2 To adjust the transparency of the tool palettes set, move the slider. 3 To turn off transparency, select Turn off window transparency. 4 Click OK. Renaming the Tool Palettes Set Use this procedure to rename the tool palettes set. You may want to name it with a project or company name. 1 In the title bar of the tool palettes set, click , and then click Rename Palette Set. 2 Enter a name for the tool palettes set, and press ENTER. Specifying Different Tool Palettes for the Tool Palettes Set Use this procedure to switch between different palette combinations in the tool palettes set. Only one tool palettes set can be active during an AutoCAD Architecture session. You can, however, set different tool palettes for different user profiles. You do this by collecting tool palettes from several locations (paths) in a profile and letting the workspace combine them into one tool palettes set. 1 Click Format menu ➤ Options. 2 Define the tool palettes used for the current session: ■ If you have created a workspace profile containing a tool palettes path, click the Profiles tab, select the desired profile, and click Set Current. ■ If you have not created a workspace profile, click the Files tab, and click the Tool Palettes File Location entry. Then click Browse, and browse for a folder containing the desired tool palette. Add paths to all additional tool palettes to be included in the tool palettes set of this profile. 3 Click OK. Creating a New Tool Palettes Set Use this procedure to create a new tool palettes set. 1 Create a folder in which you will create the new tool palettes set. The default tool palettes set is in \Documents and Settings\ \Application Data\Autodesk\ACD-A 2009\enu\Support\WorkspaceCatalog (Imperial/Metric). 2 Click Format menu ➤ Options. 3 Click the Profiles tab. 4 Click Add to List, and create a profile to contain the new tool palettes set; for example, “Design - Metric Palette Set.” 5 Select the new profile, and click Set Current. 6 Click the Files tab. 7 Under Tool Palettes File Locations, select the support path for the previously defined folder in which you will create the new tool palettes set. Specifying Different Tool Palettes for the Tool Palettes Set | 69 NOTE If you point to a folder already containing a tool palettes set, a new tool palettes set is not created; instead, the existing tool palettes set is used in the profile. 8 Click OK. In the AutoCAD Architecture workspace, an empty tool palettes set is displayed. New tool palettes set 9 To rename the tool palettes set, click , and then click Rename Palette Set. 10 Add tool palettes and tools to the new set: If you want to… Then… add a new empty tool palette see Creating a New Tool Palette on page 71. add a tool palette from the Content Browser see Adding a Tool Palette from a Tool Catalog in the Content Browser on page 75. add a tool to a palette see Creating a Tool from an Object in the Drawing on page 82. The changes you make are saved to the tool palettes set in the new profile you created. To revert back to your original tool palettes set, select your original profile in the Options dialog box. Creating a New Tool Palettes Group Use this procedure to create a new tool palettes group. 1 In the title bar of the tool palettes set, click 70 | Chapter 2 The Workspace , and then click Customize Palettes. 2 Select a palette group, right-click, and click New Group. 3 Enter a name for the new group, and press ENTER. 4 Drag the new group folder to the correct position in the tree structure. 5 Select a tool palette from the left pane for the new tool palettes group, and drag it into the new group folder. 6 Click Close. TIP The Customize dialog can be very useful for adding palettes to project palette groups. For more information, see Displaying the Project Tool Palette Group on page 434. Creating a New Tool Palette Use this procedure to add an empty tool palette to your tool palettes set. After creating the tool palette, you can add tools to it. For more information, see Tools on page 76. 1 In the title bar of the tool palettes set, click , and then click New Palette. 2 Enter a name for the new tool palette, and press ENTER. Defining the Appearance of Tool Palettes Use this procedure to define the appearance of individual tool palettes. The display of the tool palettes depends on the settings you specify for the overall tool palettes set, (as described in Controlling the Appearance of the Tool Palettes Set on page 68), and the settings you specify for individual tool palettes. In the tool palettes set, you specify the transparency, size, position, and auto-hide of the tool palettes set. On the tool palette, you specify the size of tool images and their arrangement on the tool palette. Creating a New Tool Palette | 71 Tool palettes with different sized icons displayed When you change tool images to a smaller size, you can display more tools on a tool palette. This might become important if you display different palettes at the same time, such as the Properties palette or the Project Navigator palette. To save space, you can also display tool images without tool text below them. This method is best suited when the icons for your tools are easy to differentiate. If the icon alone proves insufficient to identify a tool, the tooltip for each icon provides additional guidance. Icon-only display on the tool palette You can also display tools in a single column on the tool palette. When you are using a single-column list, tool texts is always displayed. 72 | Chapter 2 The Workspace Tool palette in list view 1 Open the tool palette that you want to change. 2 Right-click the palette, and click View Options. 3 In the View Options worksheet, select the desired View style: If you want to… Then… view only tool icons select Icon only for View style. view tool icons and tool text select Icon with text for View style. view tool icons and tool text in a single column list select List view for View style. 4 To apply these changes to all palettes in the tool palettes set, select All Palettes for Apply to. 5 Click OK. Adding Text and Separator Lines to Tool Palettes Use this procedure to add separator lines and text to a tool palette. Separator lines can be useful if you want to create subdivisions on a tool palette containing many tools. To annotate a separator line, you can insert a text element. 1 Open the tool palette to which you want to add separator lines and text. 2 Right-click in the palette between the tools where the separator should go, and click Add Separator. A separator line is inserted between the tools. 3 To add text above the separator line, right-click either to the right of the last tool before the separator line, or to the left of the separator line itself, and click Add Text. 4 Enter the text you want to display above the separator line, and press ENTER. Adding Text and Separator Lines to Tool Palettes | 73 5 To edit the text, select the text item, right-click, and click Rename. Then, edit the text as necessary. 6 To delete a separator line or a text annotation, select the separator line or text, right-click, and click Delete. Working with Tool Palettes from a Central Location When multiple users are working on a large project, consistency of tools is especially important. Typically, the objects for the project and their styles and properties are set up by a CAD manager or system administrator, and then distributed to the team. The administrator can put tools and palettes in a central location in the Content Browser and link them to each user’s computer. Whenever the tools or palettes are updated in the Content Browser, they are updated on the users’ computers too. For more information, see Understanding the Content Browser on page 121. Using tool palettes from the Content Browser TIP If you are working with an AutoCAD Architecture project, you can generate a tool catalog based on the standard styles of the project. For more information, see Creating a Tool Catalog for a Project on page 427. 74 | Chapter 2 The Workspace Adding a Tool Palette from a Tool Catalog in the Content Browser Use this procedure to link a tool palette from a tool catalog in the Content Browser to the tool palettes set in AutoCAD Architecture. For information on creating tool palettes in the Content Browser, see Adding Content to a Tool Catalog on page 139. 1 Click Window menu ➤ Content Browser. Alternatively, you can click on the Navigation toolbar, or press CTRL+4. 2 Select the tool catalog containing the tool palette you want to copy, right-click, and click Properties. 3 Select Link items when added to workspace, and click OK. 4 Open the tool catalog, and navigate to the tool palette. 5 Move the pointer over the i-drop® icon next to the tool palette so that the pointer image changes to an eyedropper ( ). To copy multiple tool palettes, press and hold CTRL while clicking each palette; then position the eyedropper over any of the selected palettes. 6 Drag the palette to the tool palettes set in the AutoCAD Architecture workspace. The tool palette is dropped into the tool palettes set. 7 Right-click on the palette, and click Properties. The text below the check box displays the name of the catalog in the Content Browser from which the palette is updated. If you click that name, it opens the catalog from which the tool palette was linked. 8 Select or clear Enable Auto-Refresh: If you want to… Then… automatically update the linked tool palette from the Content Browser when starting AutoCAD Architecture select Enable Auto-Refresh. update the linked tool palette manually with one of the methods described in Updating a Tool Palette from a Tool Catalog in the Content Browser on page 76 clear Enable Auto-Refresh. The name of the tool palette in the Content Browser (from which the selected tool palette is updated) is displayed under Name. Working with Tool Palettes from a Central Location | 75 9 Click OK. Updating a Tool Palette from a Tool Catalog in the Content Browser Use this procedure to update a linked tool palette in the tool palettes set from its source tool catalog in the Content Browser. 1 Link a tool palette from a catalog in the Content Browser to the tool palettes set, as described in Adding a Tool Palette from a Tool Catalog in the Content Browser on page 75. When a tool palette is linked to the tool palettes set from a catalog in the Content Browser, a Refresh button is displayed at the bottom of the palette. 2 Click the Refresh button to update your local tool palette with the latest changes from the catalog in the Content Browser. Alternatively, you can right-click the palette, and click Refresh Palette. NOTE You can also update the whole palette set by clicking in the tool palettes set, and then clicking Refresh Palette Set. This command updates all linked tool palettes in the tool palettes set. Tools Tools represent the individual objects you can add to a drawing. A tool contains creation parameters for the object it represents. When you add an object with a specific tool, the object has the settings you defined in the tool. This eases the design process and enhances consistency across a project. For example, you might define a wall tool that contains the style “CMU 8 Furring” and has automatic cleanup and a baseline offset of 1". Whenever you add a wall with this wall tool, the wall has the style “CMU 8 Furring,” it cleans up automatically, and it has an offset of 1". 76 | Chapter 2 The Workspace Standard object tools Based on the tool type, some general properties you can define may include: ■ Tool name ■ Tool description (also used as the tooltip and as the tool description when the tool is copied to a tool catalog in the Content Browser) ■ Description of objects inserted with this tool ■ Layer key of objects inserted with this tool ■ Layer overrides of objects inserted with this tool ■ Object style ■ Location of object style In addition, you can define object-specific properties that apply to this tool type. For example, if you create a wall tool, you can set the wall cleanup, width, height, baseline settings, and the roof/floor lines of walls that are inserted with this tool. Style Location Object styles are now located in Styles drawings, rather than in templates as in earlier releases. To assign a style to an object tool, you can either point to a style in the current drawing or to a style in an external drawing. For more information, see Styles and Support Files on page 117. Tool Types Tools in AutoCAD Architecture fall into 3 categories. Tool Category Description Object tools An object tool inserts a design object—such as a wall or a window assembly—into a drawing. An object tool has a specific style and specific object properties: for example, a wall tool might have the style “Brick-4 Brick-4.” Tools | 77 Tool Category Description Command tools Command tools are a graphical representation of an objectrelated command. For example, the Browse Property Data tool opens a dialog box for browsing the property data of all objects in a drawing; the Renumber Data tool renumbers property data in selected property sets by increment or by a user-defined number. You can also create your own tools for each command. An AutoCAD general-purpose command tool lets you associate any command or macro. For commands that create an object, you can also assign basic AutoCAD object properties. For a list of available AutoCAD Architecture command tools, see Using Command Tools on page 84. AEC Content tools You can create tools for frequently used AEC Content items that were created with the AEC Content Wizard. For more information, see Creating a Tool from AEC Content in DesignCenter on page 83. Project Standard Tools When you are working with an AutoCAD Architecture project, you can set up standard styles that are updated and synchronized throughout the project lifecycle. For more information, see Setting up Standards in a Project on page 415. Creating an Object with a Tool Use this procedure to create an object with a tool. 1 Click Window menu ➤ Tool Palettes. 2 Click the tool palette that contains the tool for the object you want to insert. 78 | Chapter 2 The Workspace For example, if you want to insert a bifold double door, click the Doors palette, and navigate to the Bifold Double Door tool. 3 Click the tool. 4 On the Properties palette, enter any changes you want to make to the default. NOTE Certain values can be set only when inserting the object; for example, the position of a door along the wall into which it is inserted can be defined only when inserting the door. You cannot change the position later for an existing door. Values that can be set only during insertion are marked with this symbol on the Properties palette. 5 Click in the drawing where you want to insert the object. 6 Follow any additional prompts as required to insert the objects in the drawing, and then press ENTER. Changing the Tool Properties Use this procedure to change the properties of a tool on a tool palette. You can set these general properties for an object tool: ■ Tool name ■ Tool description (also used as the tooltip and as the tool description when the copied to a tool catalog in the Content Browser) ■ Description of objects inserted with this tool ■ Layer key of objects inserted with this tool ■ Layer overrides of objects inserted with this tool ■ Object style (if the tool is style-based) ■ Location of object style (if the tool is style-based) In addition, you can define object-specific properties that apply to this object type. For example, if you create a wall tool, you can set the wall cleanup, width, height, baseline settings, and the roof/floor lines for all walls inserted with this tool. 1 Click Window menu ➤ Tool Palettes. 2 Click a tool palette. Changing the Tool Properties | 79 3 Select the tool, right-click, and click Properties. 4 Enter a name for the tool. 5 Click the setting for Description, enter a description of the tool, and click OK. 6 Expand Basic, and expand General. 7 Enter a description of the objects that you can create using this tool. 8 Specify a layer key and any layer key overrides; otherwise, the layer assignments specified in the layer key style in the drawing are used. 9 Click Browse for Style location, if the location is other than the current drawing to select an object style. 10 Add object-specific properties. NOTE When you click a property to enter a value, the value underneath the current property is hidden and the property field is highlighted. Enter a value for the current property in the appropriate location. 11 Click OK. Changing a Tool Icon Use this procedure to change the icon of a tool. A new tool is inserted with either the icon of the tool it was copied from or with a default icon. You can change the icon by selecting a new one from an image file or from an object in the drawing. You can also choose to display the icon as simple monochrome linework. Changing the tool icon 80 | Chapter 2 The Workspace You can use the following image formats for tool icons: ■ PNG ■ GIF ■ JPG ■ BMP ■ TIFF NOTE PNG is the recommended image format for tool icons. Icons in the tool palettes can have a maximum size of 64 x 64 pixels. Larger images are scaled when inserted. In the tool itself, you can only define the tool icon. To change the display size of the tool on the palette, see Defining the Appearance of Tool Palettes on page 71. 1 Click Window menu ➤ Tool Palettes. 2 Click the tool palette that contains the tool for which you want to select a new icon. 3 Select the tool, right-click, and click Properties. 4 On the Tool Properties worksheet, right-click the existing icon, and click Specify Image. 5 In the Select Image File dialog box, select the image you want to use as a tool icon, and click Open. 6 Click OK. 7 To display a tool as simple monochrome linework, on the Tool Properties worksheet, right-click the existing icon, and click Monochrome. The monochrome option is not available for all tools. To create an icon from an object in the drawing, select the tool in the tool palette, right-click, and Set Image from Selection. Then select the object in the drawing you want to use as a tool icon, and press ENTER. The tool icon is created with the last-used view direction and display configuration set in the viewer of the properties of this tool type. For example, if the tool viewer of the last-used wall is set to Top view and the Medium Detail display configuration, any wall you select in the drawing as a tool icon is displayed in Top view and with the Medium Detail display configuration. You cannot create icons from objects that contain custom blocks, curtain walls, or door/window assemblies with nested styles. If you need to create an icon based on a custom block, specify an external image. Refreshing a Tool Icon Use this procedure to refresh a tool icon after editing the viewer settings of the tool. 1 Click Window menu ➤ Tool Palettes. Refreshing a Tool Icon | 81 2 Click the tool palette that contains the tool icon you want to refresh. 3 Select the tool, right-click, and click Properties. 4 On the Tool Properties worksheet, change the Viewer settings of the tool. For example, switch from a SW Isometric view to a Top view. 5 Right-click the existing icon, and click Refresh Image. 6 Click OK. Creating a Tool from an Object in the Drawing Use this procedure to create a tool from an object in the drawing. You can create only object tools with this method. For information on creating command tools, see Using Command Tools on page 84. Creating a tool from an object in the drawing 1 Create an object with the appropriate style and properties in the drawing. IMPORTANT The drawing containing the style should be saved to a location where it will be available in the future. Otherwise, the tool will not be able to access the style, and will revert to the Standard style. 2 Open the tool palette where you want to create the new tool. 3 Select the object, and drag it to the tool palette. 4 Define additional properties for the tool, if necessary. For more information, see Changing the Tool Properties on page 79. Copying a Tool from a Tool Palette Use this procedure to copy a tool from one tool palette to another. 1 Open the tool palette that contains the tool you want to copy. 82 | Chapter 2 The Workspace 2 Select the tool, right-click, and click Copy. 3 Open the tool palette onto which you want to copy the tool, right-click, and click Paste. 4 Change the properties of the tool, if necessary. For more information, see Changing the Tool Properties on page 79. Creating a Tool from the Style Manager Use this procedure to create a tool from a style in the Style Manager. Creating a tool from the Style Manager 1 Open the tool palette where you want to create the new tool. 2 On the Format menu, click Style Manager, and navigate to the style you want to use. For example, if you want to create a wall tool with the Demolition style, expand Wall Styles, and select the Demolition style. 3 Drag the style to the tool palette. A new tool with the selected style is inserted in the tool palette. 4 Click OK to close the Style Manager. 5 Define additional properties for the tool in the tool palette, if necessary. For more information, see Changing the Tool Properties on page 79. Creating a Tool from AEC Content in DesignCenter Use this procedure to create a tool on a tool palette from an AEC Content item in DesignCenter. NOTE You can also create tools from blocks in DesignCenter, but they have slightly different tool options. You can drag and drop AEC content items from a DesignCenter folder to a tool palette. For more information on creating AEC Content, see Adding AEC Content to Drawings on page 2602. AutoCAD Architecture provides the Design Tool Catalog and the Documentation Tool Catalog in the Content Browser. These catalogs already have tools set up for predefined AEC Content and sample object styles. The catalogs are available for both metric and imperial units. Creating a Tool from the Style Manager | 83 Creating a tool from AEC Content in DesignCenter 1 Open the tool palette where you want to create the new tool. 2 On the Insert menu, click DesignCenter, and navigate to the AEC Content item from which you want to create a tool. 3 Drag the item to the tool palette. A new tool is inserted on the tool palette. To change the icon of the new tool, see Changing a Tool Icon on page 80. NOTE An AEC Content tool uses the last-used Viewer settings of this tool type to generate the tool icon. If the last-used Viewer setting is Gouraud 3D view, and the user creates a tool from a 2D AEC Content item, the tool icon will be invisible. In this case, you need to change the Viewer setting of the tool to a Top view, and wireframe. 4 Define additional properties for the tool, if necessary. For more information, see Changing the Tool Properties on page 79. Using Command Tools A command tool is a utility that allows you to create a graphical representation of a frequently used command on a tool palette. For example, the Browse Property Data tool opens a dialog box for browsing the property data of all objects in a drawing; the Renumber Data tool renumbers property data in selected property sets. There are a number of preconfigured command tools in the software; you can, however create a user-defined command tool from any AutoCAD and AutoCAD Architecture command, AutoLISP routines, VBA macros and applications, and scripts. 84 | Chapter 2 The Workspace Using Predefined Command Tools AutoCAD Architecture provides the following predefined command tools for commonly used tasks in a default US install: Tool Palette Group/Palette Description Horizontal Section Design/Design Generates a horizontal section. Vertical Section Design/Design Generates a vertical section. Renumber Data Document/Tag Lets you renumber objects that are included in a schedule or linked to schedule tags. Edit Property Set Data Document/Scheduling Lets you edit the property set data attached to selected objects and their styles. Browse Property Set Data Document/Scheduling Lets you access and view the data for all property sets in a drawing. Space Evaluation Document/Scheduling Starts the space evaluation. AEC Entity Reference Content Browser/Stock Tool Catalog/Helper Tools Lets you create a reference copy from one object to another in AutoCAD Architecture. Quick Slice Content Browser/Stock Tool Catalog/Helper Tools Lets you define a cross section through one or more three-dimensional (3D) objects in a drawing (including mass groups, AutoCAD blocks, and external references) and extract a polyline outline that can be used to produce a profile shape. Hidden Line Projection Content Browser/Stock Tool Catalog/Helper Tools Lets you create flat 2D projections with hidden background lines from a 3D view of objects in your drawing. Napkin Sketch Content Browser/Stock Tool Catalog/Helper Tools Lets you create freehand sketch geometry from objects in a drawing. Chamfer Content Browser/Stock Tool Catalog/Drafting Tools Lets you chamfer two walls in a drawing. Hatch and Gradient Content Browser/Stock Tool Catalog/Drafting Tools Lets you define the boundaries, pattern type, pattern properties, and other parameters for hatch and gradient fill objects. Shrink Wrap Content Browser/Stock Tool Catalog/Drafting Tools Lets you create a profile or shrinkwrap outline around any collection of contiguous linework entities, including architectural objects. Using Command Tools | 85 Tool Palette Group/Palette Description Welding Symbols Content Browser/Stock Tool Catalog/Drafting Tools Lets you create and edit welding symbols. Area Content Browser/Stock Tool Catalog/Measurement Tools Lets you measure the area of an object or a userdefined space. Attribute Extraction Content Browser/Stock Tool Catalog/Measurement Tools Lets you extract object data from drawings so that it can be exported to a table or external file. Distance Content Browser/Stock Tool Catalog/Measurement Tools Lets you measure the distance between 2 user-selected points. Point ID Content Browser/Stock Tool Catalog/Measurement Tools Lets you display the coordinates of a user-selected location. Region/3D Solid Mass Properties Content Browser/Stock Tool Catalog/Measurement Tools Lets you calculate the mass properties of regions or 3D solids Cell Anchor Content Browser/Stock Tool Catalog/Parametric Layout & Anchoring Tools Lets you attach objects to cell positions on layout grids and volume grids. Curve Anchor Content Browser/Stock Tool Catalog/Parametric Layout & Anchoring Tools Lets you attach AEC objects to the base curve of other AEC objects or linework, such as lines, arcs, circles, mass elements, polylines, roofs, or walls. Leader Anchor Content Browser/Stock Tool Catalog/Parametric Layout & Anchoring Tools Lets you anchor objects to nodes on layout curves or grids with leaders. Node Anchor Content Browser/Stock Tool Catalog/Parametric Layout & Anchoring Tools Lets you attach objects to nodes on layout curves or grids. Object Anchor Content Browser/Stock Tool Catalog/Parametric Layout & Anchoring Tools Lets you attach an AEC object to the base curve of another AEC object. Using preconfigured command tools 1 Navigate to the location of the desired command tool in the tool palettes or in Content Browser. 2 If the command tool is located on a tool palette, click it to start the command sequence. 3 If the command is located in Content Browser, either drag it to the drawing area to directly start the command, or drag it to a tool palette, and start the command from there. 86 | Chapter 2 The Workspace Using User-Defined Command Tools AutoCAD Architecture has 2 blank command tools that can be customized for user-defined commands. ■ Command Tool: A simple blank command tool that lets you execute a number of command sequences. Allowed commands include AutoCAD and AutoCAD Architecture commands, VBA macros and applications, AutoLISP routines, and scripts. ■ Command Tool with Properties: Use this tool for commands that generate AutoCAD objects like lines, AutoCAD dimensions, or solids. The property settings for color, layer, linetype, and lineweight you can set in the tool will only be used when creating AutoCAD objects. If you were to create an AEC object with this tool, the layer, color, and linetype settings specified in the display system for this object take precedence. If you want to create AEC objects with a command tool, it is recommended that you use the simple Command Tool. Command tools are created by copying the blank command tool from Content Browser to a tool palette, and editing the command properties. Creating a Simple Command Tool 1 Open Content Browser and navigate to Stock Tool Catalog ➤ Helper Tools. 2 Move the cursor over the i-drop icon next to the regular command tool and drag the tool to a tool palette. 3 On the tool palette, select the command tool, right-click, and click Properties. Command tool properties 4 Change the following tool properties as necessary: Property Description Name Lets you replace the generic command tool name with a name that describes the function of the tool. Description Lets you add a more detailed description to the command tool. Layer key Specifies the layer key to define the layer on which objects created with this command will be inserted. Layer overrides Defines overrides for the selected layer key. Using Command Tools | 87 Property Description Command Specifies the command to be executed by the tool. The following command types are valid within the Command Tool: Image ■ AutoCAD and AutoCAD Architecture commands ■ AutoLISP routines ■ VBA macros and applications ■ Scripts By default, the command tool has no associated image. To add an image that illustrates the function of the tool, right-click in the empty image area, and select an image as described in Changing a Tool Icon on page 80. 5 Click OK. Working with Tools from a Central Location You can use the Content Browser to store and organize catalog tools in a central location. A number of stock tools are available in the AutoCAD Architecture Stock Tool Catalog. Additionally, sample catalogs contain tools with styles from the Styles drawings. You can copy these tools to a tool palette and modify them. You can also create your own tool palettes and tools in a catalog in the Content Browser, copy them to a tool palette, and retain the link from the Content Browser to the tool palette. In this case, the tool is refreshed on the tool palette when it is modified in the catalog in the Content Browser. NOTE If you want to link a complete tool palette from the Content Browser to AutoCAD Architecture, see Adding a Tool Palette from a Tool Catalog in the Content Browser on page 75. Linking a Tool from a Catalog in the Content Browser Use this procedure to link a tool from a catalog in the Content Browser to a tool palette in AutoCAD Architecture. 88 | Chapter 2 The Workspace Linking a tool from a catalog in the Content Browser 1 Open the tool palette on which you want to place a tool from the Content Browser. 2 On the Window menu, click Content Browser, and navigate to the tool palette or category in the tool catalog that contains the tool you want to copy. For more information, see Searching for Items in a Tool Catalog on page 138. 3 Move the pointer over the i-drop icon next to the tool, so that the pointer image changes to an eyedropper ( ). To copy multiple tools, press and hold CTRL while clicking each tool; then position the eyedropper over any of the selected tools. You can also select all the tools in the current category by right-clicking, and clicking Select All. 4 Drag the eyedropper to a tool palette in the tool palettes set. 5 To refresh the tool, select it, right-click, and click Refresh Tool. Alternatively, you can select the tool in the tool palette, right-click, and click Properties. Then select Refresh from on the Properties worksheet. Working with Tools from a Central Location | 89 Updating a tool from the Properties worksheet NOTE When you select Refresh from, all tool properties on the worksheet are set to read-only. Properties for this tool must be changed in the Content Browser. 6 Click OK. Updating a Tool in AutoCAD Architecture from the Content Browser Use this procedure to update a tool in a tool palette that has a link to the Content Browser. NOTE You cannot change and update tools from the Stock Tool Catalog in the Content Browser. Those tools are read-only. 1 Open the tool palette that contains the tool you want to update. 2 Select the tool, right-click, and click Refresh Tool. Updating a Tool in the Content Browser from a Linked Tool in AutoCAD Architecture Use this procedure to update a tool in a catalog in the Content Browser with the properties of a linked tool from AutoCAD Architecture. For example, perhaps you have a tool in the Content Browser that adds a Box mass element of 3 x 3 x 3 meters. You want to change the tool so that it adds a Box mass element of 4 x 4 x 4 meters. You would first link the mass element tool from the Content Browser to a tool palette in AutoCAD Architecture. Then, temporarily deactivate the link and change the dimension properties of the tool to 4 x 4 x 4 meters. Next, copy the tool back to the Content Browser. The Content Browser catalog is updated with the new tool properties. Finally, reactivate the link from the Content Browser tool to the AutoCAD Architecture palette. 90 | Chapter 2 The Workspace 1 Link a tool from a catalog in the Content Browser to a tool palette as described in Linking a Tool from a Catalog in the Content Browser on page 88. 2 Select the tool in the tool palette, right-click, and click Properties. 3 On the Tool Properties worksheet, clear Refresh from. The tool properties can now be edited. 4 Make the necessary changes to the tool properties. 5 Click OK. 6 Select the tool in the tool palette, and copy it to its original location in the Content Browser catalog. NOTE You can copy a tool to a catalog in the Content Browser using the Copy and Paste commands from the context menu, or by dragging the tool onto the Content Browser icon in the Windows task bar. To select multiple tools in a tool palette, use CTRL-A to select all or drag while holding the CTRL key to create a selection window. 7 Click Yes when prompted to overwrite the previous version of the tool. 8 If you want to refresh the tool in the AutoCAD Architecture tool palette from the new version stored in the Content Browser, go back to the AutoCAD Architecture tool, right-click, and on the Tool Properties worksheet, reactivate Refresh from. Removing the Link of a Tool to a Catalog in the Content Browser Use this procedure to permanently remove the link of a tool to its source tool in the Content Browser. NOTE This action cannot be undone. 1 Open the tool palette that contains the tool you want to unlink from a catalog in the Content Browser. 2 Select the tool, right-click, and click Remove Catalog Link. Applying the Properties of a Tool to an Existing Object Use this procedure to apply the properties of a tool to an existing object. You can apply the properties of a tool to an existing object in two ways: ■ Apply the properties of a tool to an object of the same type: For example, apply the properties of a wall tool to an existing wall. All object tools have this functionality. In earlier releases of the software, you used the Match command to do this. ■ Apply the properties of a tool to a different object type: Using this method, you convert the object to an object of the same type as the tool. For example, when you apply the properties of a wall tool to a polyline, the polyline is converted to a wall with the settings defined in the wall tool. Depending on their type, various object tool types may have commands for converting other objects. For detailed information, see the chapters for the individual objects. 1 Open the tool palette that contains the tool with the properties you want to apply to a different object. 2 Select the tool, and right-click. Applying the Properties of a Tool to an Existing Object | 91 3 Define the object type to which to apply the tool properties: if you want to… Then… apply the properties of the tool to an object of the same type click Apply Tool Properties to